HP Color LaserJet 3600 Software Technical Reference, External ENWW Laser Jet Printer Reference C00563752

User Manual: HP HP Color LaserJet 3600 Printer - Software Technical Reference

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 284 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
Software Technical Reference
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
©2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Edition 1, 11/2005
Trademark credits
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,
PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are
US registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus
Torvalds
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
PANTONE*® is *Pantone, Inc.'s check-
standard trademark for color.
Pentium® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction.............................................................................................................................................1
HP Color LaserJet 3600.........................................................................................................................3
Printing-system software........................................................................................................................5
System requirements.............................................................................................................5
Windows................................................................................................................5
Macintosh..............................................................................................................5
Linux......................................................................................................................5
UNIX......................................................................................................................5
Supported operating systems ...............................................................................................6
Standalone drivers ...............................................................................................6
Print driver support in other operating systems.....................................................6
Availability..............................................................................................................................6
Printing-system software on the Web...................................................................7
Printing-system software .....................................................................7
Software component availability ..........................................................7
In-box printing-system software CDs ...................................................................8
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition ......................................8
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition.....................................9
CD versions..........................................................................................9
HP LaserJet documentation.................................................................................................................15
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.................................................................16
HP Color LaserJet 3000-3600-3800 Printing System Install Notes.....................................17
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide..............................................................................17
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide......................................................................................18
2 Software description
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................19
Printing-system software......................................................................................................................20
Windows Software features.................................................................................................20
Printing system and installer...............................................................................20
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD for
Windows systems ..............................................................................20
Installer features.................................................................................22
HP LaserJet print drivers.....................................................................................23
HP Traditional host-based driver and HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver........................................................................................23
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems...........24
Macintosh printing-system software....................................................................................25
ENWW iii
Driver Configuration for Windows.........................................................................................................26
Driver Autoconfiguration......................................................................................................26
Bidirectional communication................................................................................................26
Enterprise AutoConfiguration...............................................................................................26
Update Now.........................................................................................................................28
HP Driver Preconfiguration..................................................................................................28
Lockable features ...............................................................................................29
Continuous export ..............................................................................................29
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.............................................................................................31
HP Easy Printer Care...........................................................................................................................32
Installation options...............................................................................................................32
Access.................................................................................................................................33
Find Other Printers..............................................................................................................34
My HP Printers screen – Overview tab................................................................................39
HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab....................................................................................43
Maintenance Tools..............................................................................................44
Troubleshooting Tools.........................................................................................46
HP Embedded Web Server .................................................................................................................47
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh............................................................................................................48
Access to the HP Printer Utility............................................................................................48
Supplies Status....................................................................................................................51
Device Information...............................................................................................................53
HP Support..........................................................................................................................54
File Upload...........................................................................................................................56
Update Firmware.................................................................................................................57
Duplex mode........................................................................................................................57
Trays Configuration.............................................................................................................57
Lock Resources...................................................................................................................58
Network Settings..................................................................................................................59
Rendezvous Setting.............................................................................................................60
Supplies Management.........................................................................................................61
Additional Settings...............................................................................................................62
HP Web Jetadmin................................................................................................................................64
3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................65
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me.....................................................................67
Properties driver tabs...........................................................................................................67
Help system..........................................................................................................................................69
What's this? Help.................................................................................................................69
Context-sensitive Help.........................................................................................................69
Feature Unavailable messages ..........................................................................................69
Paper/Quality tab features....................................................................................................................70
Print Task Quick Sets .........................................................................................................71
Default Print Settings..........................................................................................71
User Guide Print Settings ...................................................................................73
Paper Options......................................................................................................................73
Size is..................................................................................................................74
Custom................................................................................................................75
Name..................................................................................................75
iv ENWW
Save, Delete, or Rename...................................................................76
Custom size (width and height controls) ............................................77
Custom width and height control limits...............................................77
Dynamic measurement units .............................................................78
Close..................................................................................................78
Source Is ............................................................................................................79
Type is ................................................................................................................79
Use Different Paper For......................................................................................80
First Page...........................................................................................80
Other Pages.......................................................................................81
Document preview image....................................................................................................82
Print Quality.........................................................................................................................82
Finishing tab features...........................................................................................................................84
Print Task Quick Sets..........................................................................................................85
Document Options...............................................................................................................85
Correct order for rear bin.....................................................................................85
Print on Both Sides (Manually) ...........................................................................85
Flip Pages Up .....................................................................................................85
Booklet layout is..................................................................................................86
Book and Booklet Printing..................................................................86
Pages per Sheet.................................................................................................87
Print Page Borders..............................................................................................88
Page Order is......................................................................................................88
Document preview image....................................................................................................88
Rotate..................................................................................................................................89
Effects tab features..............................................................................................................................90
Print Task Quick Sets..........................................................................................................91
Resizing Options..................................................................................................................91
Print Document On .............................................................................................91
Scale to Fit..........................................................................................................91
% of Normal Size................................................................................................92
Document preview image....................................................................................................92
Watermarks.........................................................................................................................92
Watermarks.........................................................................................................93
First Page Only...................................................................................................93
Edit......................................................................................................................93
Current Watermarks...........................................................................94
Watermark Message..........................................................................94
Message Angle...................................................................................95
Options...............................................................................................95
Document preview image...................................................................95
Font Attributes....................................................................................95
Default watermark settings.................................................................96
Basics tab features ..............................................................................................................................98
Print Task Quick Sets..........................................................................................................99
Orientation ..........................................................................................................................99
Page order...........................................................................................................................99
Copies..................................................................................................................................99
Document preview image..................................................................................................100
Color tab features...............................................................................................................................101
ENWW v
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................102
Color Options.....................................................................................................................102
Print all text as black.........................................................................................102
Print in Grayscale..............................................................................................102
Document preview image..................................................................................................102
Device Settings tab features .............................................................................................................103
Paper Handling Options.....................................................................................................104
Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................104
Allow scaling from large paper..........................................................................104
Optional Paper Sources ...................................................................................104
About tab features..............................................................................................................................105
4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................107
Access to print drivers........................................................................................................................108
Printing Preferences driver tabs........................................................................................108
Properties driver tabs.........................................................................................................108
Help system........................................................................................................................................110
What's this? Help...............................................................................................................110
Context-sensitive Help.......................................................................................................110
Incompatible Print Settings messages...............................................................................110
Advanced tab features.......................................................................................................................112
Paper/Output.....................................................................................................................113
Copy Count ......................................................................................................113
Collated.............................................................................................................113
Graphic..............................................................................................................................113
Image Color Management.................................................................................113
Document Options.............................................................................................................114
Advanced Printing Features..............................................................................114
Printer Features................................................................................................114
Layout Options..................................................................................................115
Paper/Quality tab features..................................................................................................................116
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................117
Default Print Settings........................................................................................117
User Guide Print Settings..................................................................................119
Type new Quick Set name here .......................................................................119
Paper Options....................................................................................................................120
Size is................................................................................................................121
Custom Paper Size...........................................................................................121
Name................................................................................................121
Paper size ........................................................................................122
Units.................................................................................................122
Custom width and height control limits.............................................122
Source Is...........................................................................................................123
Type is...............................................................................................................123
Use Different Paper/Covers...............................................................................................124
Front Cover.......................................................................................................125
First Page..........................................................................................................126
Other Pages......................................................................................................127
Last Page..........................................................................................................128
vi ENWW
Back Cover........................................................................................................129
Document preview image..................................................................................................130
Effects tab features............................................................................................................................131
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................132
Resizing options................................................................................................................132
Actual Size........................................................................................................132
Print Document On ...........................................................................................132
Scale to Fit .......................................................................................................132
% of Normal Size..............................................................................................133
Document preview image..................................................................................................133
Watermarks.......................................................................................................................134
Current watermarks...........................................................................................135
Watermark Message.........................................................................................135
Message Angle.................................................................................................135
Font Attributes...................................................................................................135
Default watermark settings................................................................................136
Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................................138
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................139
Document Options.............................................................................................................139
Print on Both Sides...........................................................................................139
Automatically printing on both sides .................................................................139
Manually printing on both sides.........................................................................140
Flip Pages Up....................................................................................................141
Booklet layout....................................................................................................142
Book and Booklet Printing.................................................................................142
Pages per Sheet...............................................................................................143
Print Page Borders............................................................................................143
Page Order........................................................................................................143
Document preview image..................................................................................................144
Orientation ........................................................................................................................144
Color tab features...............................................................................................................................145
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................146
Color Options.....................................................................................................................146
Automatic..........................................................................................................146
Manual..............................................................................................................146
General.............................................................................................................147
Document preview image..................................................................................................147
Services tab........................................................................................................................................149
Device Settings .................................................................................................................................151
Form to Tray Assignment..................................................................................................152
Installable Options.............................................................................................................152
Automatic Configuration....................................................................................152
Tray 3................................................................................................................153
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ....................................................................153
Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................153
Printer Memory..................................................................................................153
About tab............................................................................................................................................154
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................155
ENWW vii
Font support.......................................................................................................................................156
Basic fonts ........................................................................................................................156
Default fonts.......................................................................................................................156
Installation instructions.......................................................................................................................162
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................162
Installing from the printing-system CD..............................................................162
Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................162
Detailed Windows installation............................................................................................163
Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons..............................................163
Modifying a pre-existing installation..................................................................164
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ...............................164
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.......................................................184
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows.....................................................185
Running the Installer Customization Wizard.....................................185
Dialogs..............................................................................................186
Distribution........................................................................................199
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server
2003..................................................................................................................199
Setting a default printer......................................................................................................200
6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................201
Macintosh component descriptions....................................................................................................202
HP LaserJet PPDs.............................................................................................................202
PDEs..................................................................................................................................202
HP Embedded Web Server...............................................................................................202
Install notes........................................................................................................................202
Online help.........................................................................................................................202
Screen fonts.......................................................................................................................202
Installing the Macintosh printing system.............................................................................................203
Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS.......................203
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4.........................................................................204
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3.........................................................................208
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system........................................................................................209
In-box disk layout...............................................................................................................................210
Mac OS X installation.........................................................................................................................211
Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................................211
7 Engineering Details
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................217
File to E-mail utility.............................................................................................................................218
Media attributes..................................................................................................................................220
Media sources and destinations........................................................................................220
Media-source commands..................................................................................................220
Media types and sizes.......................................................................................................221
Driver features and attributes............................................................................221
Custom paper sizes..........................................................................................223
Media-type commands......................................................................................224
Remote firmware update ...................................................................................................................225
Determining the current level of firmware .........................................................................225
viii ENWW
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site......................................................225
Downloading the new firmware to the product...................................................................225
Printer messages during the firmware update ..................................................................226
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser...............................................227
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection...........................228
Windows operating systems.............................................................................228
Macintosh operating systems............................................................................230
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port ...................................................230
Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................231
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 ......................................................................................231
Remote firmware update through a USB port....................................................................232
Remote firmware update through a Windows network .....................................................233
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems .....................................................................234
Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility....................................................234
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command .....................................................235
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .......................................................235
Printing print-ready documents .........................................................................................................237
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser...................................................237
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection...............................237
Windows operating systems.............................................................................238
Macintosh operating systems............................................................................239
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port............................................................239
Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................240
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003......240
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network...................................................................241
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems...........................................................................241
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command .........................................................241
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems...................................................................242
Raster compression ..........................................................................................................242
PJL/PJL Encoding.............................................................................................................242
Job tracking.......................................................................................................................243
Connectivity/Printing..........................................................................................................243
Bidirectional communication .............................................................................................244
HP Driver Preconfiguration ...............................................................................................245
Bundle support...................................................................................................................245
Tray and paper assignment...............................................................................................245
Installable options .............................................................................................................246
Printer services .................................................................................................................246
UI features ........................................................................................................................247
Help features ....................................................................................................................247
Quick Sets.........................................................................................................................248
Paper Sizes.......................................................................................................................248
Media Types......................................................................................................................248
Print quality and resolution................................................................................................249
Reordering Options............................................................................................................249
Resizing options................................................................................................................250
Color settings.....................................................................................................................250
Watermarks ......................................................................................................................251
Alternative source/paper type............................................................................................251
ENWW ix
Finishing options and duplexing........................................................................................252
Other document options....................................................................................................252
Font support.......................................................................................................................253
Index...................................................................................................................................................................255
xENWW
List of tables
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview...........................................................................................1
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3600 features....................................................................................................3
Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3600.........................................................7
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe....................................................................................................10
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe............................................................................................................11
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian..........................................................................12
Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe..............................................................................................................13
Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia................................................................................................................................13
Table 1-9 Documentation availability............................................................................................................15
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.....................................................23
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional
communication in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003..................................26
Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share.........................................................27
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments ........................................................................27
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration .......................................................30
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3600............................................72
Table 3-2 Name drop-down menu text strings..............................................................................................76
Table 3-3 PCL 6 custom media sizes ...........................................................................................................78
Table 3-4 Close dialog box text strings.........................................................................................................78
Table 3-5 Page orientation............................................................................................................................85
Table 3-6 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.................................................................96
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3600..........................................117
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes .........................................................................................................122
Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks...............................................................137
Table 4-4 Page orientation..........................................................................................................................141
Table 5-1 Default fonts................................................................................................................................156
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts.....................................................................................................158
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems.......................................................................203
Table 7-1 HP Color LaserJet 3600 media sources and destinations .........................................................220
Table 7-2 Media-source commands ...........................................................................................................220
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes.........................................................................................221
Table 7-4 Supported input media types......................................................................................................222
Table 7-5 Custom media sizes ...................................................................................................................223
Table 7-6 Media-type commands................................................................................................................224
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update ............................................................................................226
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure .................................................................................226
Table 7-9 Update messages.......................................................................................................................227
Table 7-10 Color raster compression support ..............................................................................................242
Table 7-11 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding..........................................................................242
Table 7-12 Driver support for job tracking.....................................................................................................243
ENWW xi
Table 7-13 Driver support for connectivity features ......................................................................................243
Table 7-14 Driver support for bidirectional communication features ............................................................244
Table 7-15 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration ............................................................................245
Table 7-16 Bundle support............................................................................................................................245
Table 7-17 Tray and paper assignment........................................................................................................245
Table 7-18 Driver support for installable options...........................................................................................246
Table 7-19 Printer services (Services tab)....................................................................................................246
Table 7-20 Driver support for UI features......................................................................................................247
Table 7-21 Driver support for Help features..................................................................................................247
Table 7-22 Driver support for Quick Sets......................................................................................................248
Table 7-23 Driver support for paper sizes.....................................................................................................248
Table 7-24 Driver support for media types....................................................................................................248
Table 7-25 Print-quality and resolution features ...........................................................................................249
Table 7-26 Driver support for reordering options..........................................................................................249
Table 7-27 Resizing options..........................................................................................................................250
Table 7-28 Color settings..............................................................................................................................250
Table 7-29 Driver support for watermarks feature ........................................................................................251
Table 7-30 Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature ..............................................................251
Table 7-31 Duplexing....................................................................................................................................252
Table 7-32 Other document options..............................................................................................................252
Table 7-33 Font support................................................................................................................................253
xii ENWW
List of figures
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer documentation screen.................................................................15
Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser..................................................................................................21
Figure 2-2 HP Easy Printer Care – My HP Printers screen............................................................................34
Figure 2-3 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers screen......................................................................35
Figure 2-4 Advanced Search Settings screen................................................................................................35
Figure 2-5 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Searching for printers, please wait..
screen...........................................................................................................................................36
Figure 2-6 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Verify Printer Found screen..................................36
Figure 2-7 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen.......................37
Figure 2-8 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen...............37
Figure 2-9 HP Easy Printer Care – Alert Settings screen...............................................................................38
Figure 2-10 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer......................................................................39
Figure 2-11 HP Easy Printer Care – Overview tab...........................................................................................39
Figure 2-12 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen...........................................................42
Figure 2-13 Welcome to HP SureSupply screen..............................................................................................42
Figure 2-14 HP InstantSupport screen.............................................................................................................46
Figure 2-15 Select Printer screen — printer not selected.................................................................................49
Figure 2-16 Connection Type screen...............................................................................................................49
Figure 2-17 Select Printer screen — printer selected.......................................................................................50
Figure 2-18 Printer Status screen.....................................................................................................................51
Figure 2-19 Supplies Status screen.................................................................................................................51
Figure 2-20 Supplies Information screen..........................................................................................................52
Figure 2-21 Order Supplies link........................................................................................................................52
Figure 2-22 Paper Status screen......................................................................................................................53
Figure 2-23 Device Information screen............................................................................................................54
Figure 2-24 HP Online Support screen............................................................................................................55
Figure 2-25 HP Instant Support link.................................................................................................................55
Figure 2-26 File Upload screen........................................................................................................................56
Figure 2-27 Duplex mode screen.....................................................................................................................57
Figure 2-28 Trays Configuration screen...........................................................................................................58
Figure 2-29 Lock Resources screen.................................................................................................................59
Figure 2-30 IP Settings screen.........................................................................................................................60
Figure 2-31 Rendezvous screen......................................................................................................................61
Figure 2-32 Replace Supplies screen..............................................................................................................62
Figure 2-33 Additional Settings screen.............................................................................................................63
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button...........................................................................69
Figure 3-2 Paper/Quality tab .........................................................................................................................70
Figure 3-3 Paper Options group box (default)................................................................................................74
Figure 3-4 Custom Paper Size dialog box......................................................................................................75
Figure 3-5 First Page options ........................................................................................................................81
ENWW xiii
Figure 3-6 Other Pages options.....................................................................................................................82
Figure 3-7 The default Finishing tab...............................................................................................................84
Figure 3-8 Printing a booklet..........................................................................................................................87
Figure 3-9 Page-order preview images .........................................................................................................88
Figure 3-10 Effects tab.....................................................................................................................................90
Figure 3-11 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)..........................................91
Figure 3-12 Watermark Details dialog box.......................................................................................................93
Figure 3-13 Basics tab .....................................................................................................................................98
Figure 3-14 Color tab......................................................................................................................................101
Figure 3-15 Configure tab...............................................................................................................................103
Figure 3-16 About tab.....................................................................................................................................105
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message....................................................................................110
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab ............................................................................112
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab........................................................................................................................116
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box ...........................................................................................................120
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box ...................................................................................................121
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options ....................................................................................................................125
Figure 4-7 First Page options ......................................................................................................................126
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options ..................................................................................................................127
Figure 4-9 Last Page options ......................................................................................................................128
Figure 4-10 Back Cover setting......................................................................................................................129
Figure 4-11 Effects tab ..................................................................................................................................131
Figure 4-12 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) .......................................133
Figure 4-13 Watermark Details dialog box.....................................................................................................134
Figure 4-14 Finishing tab ...............................................................................................................................138
Figure 4-15 Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................143
Figure 4-16 Color tab......................................................................................................................................145
Figure 4-17 Color Settings dialog box............................................................................................................147
Figure 4-18 Services tab................................................................................................................................149
Figure 4-19 Device Settings tab.....................................................................................................................151
Figure 4-20 About tab.....................................................................................................................................154
Figure 5-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box......................................................163
Figure 5-2 Cancel dialog box........................................................................................................................163
Figure 5-3 Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................164
Figure 5-4 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Setup Wizard dialog box ...........................................165
Figure 5-5 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System...........................................................................165
Figure 5-6 Software License Agreement dialog box.....................................................................................166
Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................166
Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box...................................................................................................................167
Figure 5-9 Firewall Detected dialog box.......................................................................................................168
Figure 5-10 Printer Not Found dialog box......................................................................................................169
Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box...........................................................................................................169
Figure 5-12 Printer Found dialog box.............................................................................................................170
Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box..........................................................................................171
Figure 5-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box..........................................................................................172
Figure 5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box..........................................................................................172
Figure 5-16 Specify Printer dialog box...........................................................................................................173
Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box..........................................................................................................174
Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box...........................................................................................................174
Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box............................................................................................175
xiv ENWW
Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box.........................................................................................................176
Figure 5-21 Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................................176
Figure 5-22 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................177
Figure 5-23 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................178
Figure 5-24 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................178
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box .........................................................................................................179
Figure 5-26 Printer Properties General tab....................................................................................................179
Figure 5-27 Printer Properties Sharing tab.....................................................................................................180
Figure 5-28 Additional Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................181
Figure 5-29 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................181
Figure 5-30 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................182
Figure 5-31 Next Steps dialog box.................................................................................................................182
Figure 5-32 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Installation Customization Wizard screen..................186
Figure 5-33 Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................186
Figure 5-34 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box..................................................................187
Figure 5-35 Language dialog box...................................................................................................................187
Figure 5-36 Printer Port dialog box.................................................................................................................188
Figure 5-37 Browse for Printer dialog box......................................................................................................189
Figure 5-38 Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................189
Figure 5-39 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box...................................................................................................190
Figure 5-40 Port Creation Options dialog box................................................................................................191
Figure 5-41 Driversdialog box........................................................................................................................191
Figure 5-42 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................192
Figure 5-43 Driver Configuration dialog box...................................................................................................193
Figure 5-44 Driver Configuration – Printing Preferences dialog box..............................................................193
Figure 5-45 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................194
Figure 5-46 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................194
Figure 5-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box..........................................................................................195
Figure 5-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box...........................................................................................195
Figure 5-49 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................198
Figure 5-50 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................198
Figure 6-1 Printer List screen.......................................................................................................................204
Figure 6-2 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab............................................................................204
Figure 6-3 More Printers screen...................................................................................................................205
Figure 6-4 IP Printer tab...............................................................................................................................206
Figure 6-5 Printer List screen.......................................................................................................................207
Figure 6-6 Print Job Status screen...............................................................................................................207
Figure 6-7 CD-ROM HP Color LaserJet 3600 installer icon.........................................................................211
Figure 6-8 hp LaserJet Software dialog box.................................................................................................211
Figure 6-9 HP Color LaserJet v.5.6.0.068 icon............................................................................................211
Figure 6-10 Authenticate dialog box...............................................................................................................212
Figure 6-11 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup screen dialog box ..................................................212
Figure 6-12 License dialog box......................................................................................................................213
Figure 6-13 HP Color LaserJet Installer dialog box (Easy Install) .................................................................213
Figure 6-14 HP Color LaserJet Installer dialog box (Custom Install) .............................................................214
Figure 6-15 Installing dialog box ....................................................................................................................214
Figure 6-16 LaserJet Readme icon................................................................................................................214
Figure 6-17 Installation success message.....................................................................................................215
Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached........................................................219
ENWW xv
xvi ENWW
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software.
This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center
(CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS)
personnel, and HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer end users, as appropriate.
The following information is included in this STR:
Descriptions of drivers and platforms, with system modifications
Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
Descriptions of various topics that are associated with the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer,
including engineering details
The following table describes the structure of this STR.
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview
Chapter Content
Chapter 1, Purpose and Scope This chapter contains basic information about the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
and its software:
Overview of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
Printing-system software overview, including the following topics:
System requirements
Supported operating systems
Availability
HP LaserJet software documentation
Chapter 2, Software description This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and
print drivers:
Printing-system software
ENWW Introduction 1
Purpose and scope
Chapter Content
This chapter also contains general information about other software features,
including the following topics:
Driver configuration for Windows
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
HP Embedded Web Server
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh (a new HP software feature)
HP Web Jetadmin
Chapter 3, Host-Based Drivers This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based
driver and the HP Traditional host-based driver.
This chapter also contains information about using Job Storage features when
printing, including the following topics:
Releasing a Job Storage print job
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Chapter 4, Installing Windows printing-
system components
This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
in Microsoft® Windows® operating systems by using various installation methods.
Chapter 5, Installation for Macintosh
operating systems
This chapter provides Instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
in Macintosh operating systems.
Chapter 6, Engineering details This chapter contains information about the following special topics:
Media attributes
Remote firmware update
Printing print-ready documents
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
For additional information about the location of information within these chapters, see the table of
contents. An index is provided in the back of this STR.
Additional detailed information about the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software is published
in an addendum to this STR. Information that is available only in the addendum includes:
Lists of installed files
System-modification information, such as changes to the registry and registry keys
Descriptions of known software issues and solutions
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview (continued)
2 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
HP Color LaserJet 3600
The following table contains descriptions of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer features that are
discussed in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3600 features
Models Base model: HP Color LaserJet 3600 (part number
Q5986A)
HP Color LaserJet 3600n (part number Q5987A)
HP Color LaserJet 3600dn (part number Q5988A)
Performance Prints up to 17 pages per minute (ppm) for letter- and A4-
sized paper.
First page prints in 14 seconds or less. The printer can be
set to wake from sleep mode at a specific time each day.
Memory 64 megabytes (MB) of memory for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 and theHP Color
LaserJet 3600n; 128 MB for the HP Color
LaserJet 3600dn.
User interface Two-line back-lit graphical display on control panel
Enhanced Help with animated graphics
Embedded Web Server that provides network
configuration and status information
Printer driver HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Mac OS X
V10.1.5 and later
HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows 98 and
Windows Millenium Edition (Windows Me)
Environmental features Sleep-mode setting
High content of recyclable components and materials
Energy Star® compliant
Paper handling Prints on media sizes from 148 mm x 210 mm (5.83
inches x 8.27 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm
(8.5 inches x 14 inches) (Legal size)
Tray 1 can process heavy-weight media from 60 g/m
2
to
220 g/m
2
(16 lb to 60 lb), as well as standard 80-lb cover
stock.
Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to
120 g/m
2
(32 lb) in weight
Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP photo
media, glossy papers, transparencies, heavy stock,
labels, and envelopes
Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the
appropriate glossy media type
ENWW HP Color LaserJet 3600 3
Purpose and scope
Standard 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray (tray 1)
supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),
Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media
Standard 250-sheet paper feeder (tray 2) supports Letter,
Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4,
and custom media
Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) supports
Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),
Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media
Standard 500-sheet face-down output bin
The duplexing unit for automatic two-sided printing
(duplexing) is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3600dn
printer.
Automatic duplexing of 120-g/m
2
(32-lb) paper at full
speed produces up to 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute.
Accessories Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3)
Connectivity HP Jetdirect embedded print server is standard on the
HP Color LaserJet 3600n and HP Color LaserJet 3600dn
models
Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection
HP Web Jetadmin software is standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3600n and the HP Color LaserJet 3600dn
models
Supplies The supplies status page contains information about
toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.
High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic toner-
seal removal feature
The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges when
a cartridge is installed.
Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the
HP Easy Printer Care
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3600 features (continued)
4 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
Printing-system software
This section contains information about the following topics:
System requirements
Supported operating systems
Availability
System requirements
The section lists system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-
system software on each of these supported operating systems:
Windows
Macintosh
Linux
UNIX
Windows
Pentium® or compatible processor
Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640-by-480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system
220 MB of available hard-disk space (on the same partition as the operating system) for full
installation
Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection
Macintosh
PowerPC processor
Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later.
128 MB RAM
160 MB available disk space
Linux
For information about Linux support for the printer, see the HP Linux Web site:
www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
UNIX
For information about UNIX support for the printer, see the following Web sites:
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts
ENWW Printing-system software 5
Purpose and scope
Supported operating systems
Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
Operating systems that are not described in this STR provide varying levels of functionality.
Throughout this STR, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP
Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
Information relating to networking functions is specific to products that have network capabilities.
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-
bit print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 has not been tested with and is not supported in the Windows 3.1x or
Windows 95 operating systems.
The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3600. Print drivers for
the printer are not included on the printing-system software CD and are not available on the Web. Other
drivers might work on the printer, but some print-driver features and functions might not be available.
For more information about the HP Color LaserJet 3600, go to:
www.hp.com/support/clj3600
Standalone drivers
The following operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software:
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)
Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1 and later; 32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Print driver support in other operating systems
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 is also supported in the following operating environments:
Mac OS X (V10.2 or later)
Linux (available on the following Web site)
www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
UNIX (available on the following Web site)
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
Availability
This section provides information about the availability of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system
software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from
HP fulfillment centers.
6 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an option
for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This
STR does not describe drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.
Printing-system software
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software is available for download at the following Web
site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software
NOTE Only 32-bit print drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If your
computer is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit
print drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software
For information about driver support in various operating systems, see Supported operating
systems.
For more information about installing printer drivers for Windows, see Installing Windows printing-
system components.
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
These drivers are available on the HP Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software
NOTE All components listed below are available both on the printing-system software CD and
on the Web, except for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit drivers and components,
which are available only on the Web.
Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3600
Component Windows 98
and
Windows Me
Windows 2000
and
Windows XP
(32-bit)
1
Windows XP
and
Windows Ser
ver 2003 (64-
bit)
Macintosh
Drivers
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver x x x
HP Traditional host-based driver x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x
Installer
ENWW Printing-system software 7
Purpose and scope
Component Windows 98
and
Windows Me
Windows 2000
and
Windows XP
(32-bit)
1
Windows XP
and
Windows Ser
ver 2003 (64-
bit)
Macintosh
Common Windows Installer x x
Customization Utility Wizard x x
CD Browser x x
Add Printer Wizard install x x x
Web Registration x x
Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later x
1
This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
In-box printing-system software CDs
The software CD for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer contains a variety of files for installing the
printing-system software on your computer. This section describes the files that are available on the
software CD and provides additional information about support and availability.
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of
the following operating platforms:
Windows
Macintosh
The files in each partition include documentation files and files that are required in order to install and
uninstall the printing-system components.
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file,
SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:
Autorun
Drivers
Fonts
HP Easy Printer Care
hw
Manuals
Port Monitor
Temp
WebReg
Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3600 (continued)
8 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
Drivers
Manuals
NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
To view the files, insert the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD, right-click Start, click
Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by language
and reside in the following directories:
Mac OS X (installer for Mac OS X operating system)
PDF
NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
CD versions
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD is available in five versions, each of which
contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows:
CD AM – Americas and Europe (Part No. Q5987-60102):
CA = Catalan (Català)
DE = German (Deutsch)
EN = English
ES = Spanish (Español)
FR = French (Français)
IT = Italian (Italiano)
NL = Dutch (Nederland)
PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
CD WE – Western Europe (Part No. Q5987-60103):
DA = Danish (Dansk)
EN = English
FI = Finnish
HE = Hebrew
NO = Norwegian
SV = Swedish
ENWW Printing-system software 9
Purpose and scope
CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (Part No. Q5987-60104):
AR = Arabic
EL = Greek
EN = English
FR = French
RU = Russian
TR = Turkish
CD EE – Eastern Europe (Part No. Q5987-60105):
CS = Czech
EN = English
HU = Hungarian
PL = Polish (Polski)
SK = Slovak
CD AP – Asia (Part No. Q5987-60106):
EN = English
ID = Indonesian
JA = Japanese
KO = Korean
TH = Thai
ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
Each of the following tables lists one of the software CD versions, along with the printing-system software
components that are supported in each language.
NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/
regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs.
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe
Component CA DE EN ES FR IT NL PT
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver
x x x x x x x
HP Traditional host-based
driver
x x x x x x x
Common Windows
Installer
xx xxxxxx
10 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
Component CA DE EN ES FR IT NL PT
Add Printer Wizard
Installer
x x x x x x x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x x x x x x x
CD Browser x x x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x x x x x x
Printer Usage Report x x x x x x x
HP Printer Utility for
Macintosh
x x x x x x x
Fonts x x x x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3
600/3800 User Guide
(.PDF)
x x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3
600/3800 User Guide
(.CHM)
x x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's Guide
x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000-3
600-3800 Printing System
Install Notes
x x x x x x x
HP Embedded Web
Server User Guide
xxxxxx
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe
Component DN EN FI HE NO SV
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based
driver
x x x x x x
HP Traditional host-based driver x x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x
HP Device Installer Customization
Wizard
x x x x x
CD Browser x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x x x
Printer Usage Report x
HP Printer Utilityfor Macintosh x x x x x
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe (continued)
ENWW Printing-system software 11
Purpose and scope
Component DN EN FI HE NO SV
Fonts x x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/380
0 User Guide (.PDF)
x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/380
0 User Guide (.CHM)
x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000-3600-38
00 Printing System Install Notes
x x x x x x
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide
xxx xx
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian
Component AR EL EN FR RU TR
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based
driver
x x x x x x
HP Traditional host-based
driver
x x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x x
CD Browser x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x x x
Printer Usage Report x x
HP Printer Utility for
Macintosh
x x
Fonts x x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/360
0/3800 User Guide (.PDF)
x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/360
0/3800 User Guide (.CHM)
x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x xxxx
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe (continued)
12 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
Component AR EL EN FR RU TR
HP Color LaserJet 3000-360
0-3800 Printing System Install
Notes
x x x x x x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
xx
Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe
Component CZ EN HU PL SK
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver x x x x
HP Traditional host-based driver x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x
HP Device Installer Customization
Wizard
x
CD Browser x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x
Printer Usage Report x x
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x
Fonts x x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.PDF)
x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.CHM)
x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000-3600-3800
Printing System Install Notes
xxxx
Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia
Component EN ID JA KO TH ZHCN ZHTW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver
x x x x x
HP Traditional host-based
driver
x x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (continued)
ENWW Printing-system software 13
Purpose and scope
Component EN ID JA KO TH ZHCN ZHTW
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
CD Browser x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x
Printer Usage Report x
HP Printer Utility for
Macintosh
x x x x x
Fonts x
HP Web Registration x x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/360
0/3800 User Guide (.PDF)
x x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/360
0/3800 User Guide (.CHM)
x x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000-36
00-3800 Printing System
Install Notes
x xxxxx
Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia (continued)
14 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
HP LaserJet documentation
The following figure shows the printer documentation screen, which appears when you click Printer
Documentation on the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD.
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer documentation screen
The following table lists the availability of HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system documentation by
operating system.
Table 1-9 Documentation availability
Document Windows 98/
Me
Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003
Macintosh
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file) x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000-3600-3800 Printing System Install Notes x x
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide xx x
Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location. Some documents
can be opened from the CD Browser. Others appear on the software CD and can be opened by
ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 15
Purpose and scope
navigating to the folder where they reside. Still others are available on the Web through links in the CD
Browser or CD folders. Documents are available in the following file formats:
Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD
includes Adobe® Acrobat® Reader for viewing online documentation. If your system does not have
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any of the links to documentation that is
provided in the .PDF file format opens a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader software that runs from
the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is
not installed on your computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the
CD-ROM drive.
Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft
HTML Viewer opens the file on your computer screen.
Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web
browser opens the file on your computer screen.
Rich Text format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to files and open them in Microsoft
Word or Microsoft WordPad.
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide
The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide describes the basic features of the product.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click User Guide (Interactive).
The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide is
provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3600_USE_XXWW.CHM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the guide is CLJ3600_USE_FRWW.CHM
The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print. To
print the guide, follow these steps:
1. In the CD Browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click User Guide (Printer Friendly). The guide opens.
3. Print the guide.
16 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3600_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the guide is CLJ3600_USE_FRWW.PDF
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Color LaserJet 3000-3600-3800 Printing System Install Notes
The HP Color LaserJet 3000-3600-3800 Printing System Install Notes (in .HTM format) contains
important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and
technical assistance.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click Install Notes.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3600_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the document is CLJ3600_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM.
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status,
settings, and networking for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click Embedded Web Server Guide.
ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 17
Purpose and scope
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3600_EWS_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
CLJ3600_EWS_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains
information about connecting the product directly to a network.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click HP Jetdirect Guide.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
18 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Purpose and scope
2 Software description
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and
Apple Computer, Inc. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web.
For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see the section that
corresponds to that system.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
Printing-system software
Driver Configuration for Windows
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
HP Easy Printer Care
HP Embedded Web Server
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
HP Web Jetadmin
ENWW Introduction 19
Software description
Printing-system software
This section contains information about the following topics:
Windows Software features
Macintosh printing-system software
Windows Software features
This section contains information about the following topics:
Printing system and installer
HP LaserJet print drivers
Printing system and installer
The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the
software CD that came with the product.
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD for Windows systems
For the Microsoft Windows environment (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003), the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD provides an
interactive CD browser that you can use to install the print drivers and related components, and to gain
access to online user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe Acrobat Reader software, and
optional HP software.
The following figure shows the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software
CD, which appears when you insert the printing-system software CD in your CD-ROM drive. If the screen
does not appear when you insert the software CD, follow these steps to open the CD browser:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Run.
3. Click Browse.... and navigate to the root directory of the software CD.
4. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer.
20 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser
The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and
documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move your cursor over each option, a description
of the option appears above the product image.
NOTE The options on your product might differ from the illustration.
Install Printer. The installation wizard guides you through the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system
software installation. You are given the choice of performing a Basic Installation, a Full Installation, or
a Custom Installation. If you select Basic Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you
select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install.
Installer Customization Wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP Color LaserJet 3600 installer by
presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that you have customized can then be
used for silent, unattended installation.
HP Easy Printer Care Software. Use this option to install HP's easy-to-use printer maintenance tool.
This software helps you easily track and maintain your printers by providing simple status and alerts,
usage and supplies information - for one or multiple printers. Ideal for the person who keeps your printers
up and running.
Register Product. Use this option to register your product online. After Web registration, you can gain
access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices,
and personalized newsletters.
ENWW Printing-system software 21
Software description
Printer Documentation. Use this option to view the HP Color LaserJet 3600 user documentation. The
following document options are available when you click this option:
User Guide (Interactive)
User Guide (Printer Friendly)
Install Notes
HP Jetdirect Guide
NOTE If your system does not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any
of the links to documentation that is in portable document format (.PDF) opens a version of Adobe
Acrobat Reader that runs from the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD. The
CD Browser version of Acrobat Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized
versions of .PDF documents. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on your
computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe
Acrobat Reader is also available at the following Web site: www.adobe.com.
Support. To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer, you
can view a list of optional software programs and links to HP Web sites. The following options are
available:
Click HP Web Jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browser-
based network-management tool.
Click Color Matching Information for information about simulating PANTONE*® MATCHING
SYSTEM colors and installing International Color Consortium (ICC) color profiles for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
Click Supplies for information about ordering HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer supplies.
Click Product Information for HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer support information and updates.
Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support,
drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product.
The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
The common installer offers the following features:
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD features an interactive software
interface. See HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD for Windows systems.
Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked product
in a single process.
The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You
can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system
software CD.
22 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD also includes the following features:
The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
The HP Customization Utility for custom installations
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-
system installer. The installer automatically detects your language of choice and your operating system.
You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Basic Installation, Full Installation, or Custom
Installation.
HP LaserJet print drivers
HP Color LaserJet 3600 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the
computer and the product. The printing system includes software for end users and network
administrators who are working in the following operating environments:
Windows 98 and Windows Me
Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Apple Mac OS X (V10.1 and later)
In Windows operating systems, automatic configuration, driver updates after a new configuration, and
preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the
readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software,
see the HP Color LaserJet 3000-3600-3800 Printing System Install Notes on the printing-system
software CD.
All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in
chapter 3 of this STR.
HP Traditional host-based driver and HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver
All of the Windows drivers are supported by Microsoft 32-bit operating systems. Separate versions of
the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver are available for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit
operating systems. These 64-bit drivers are not included on the printing-system software CD, but they
can be downloaded from the following HP Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software
The following drivers are available on the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD:
The HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows 98, and Windows Me
The HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
Operating System
1
HP Traditional host-based driver HP JetReady 4.2 host-based
driver
Windows 98 and Windows Me X
Windows 2000 X
ENWW Printing-system software 23
Software description
Operating System
1
HP Traditional host-based driver HP JetReady 4.2 host-based
driver
Windows XP X
Windows Server 2003 X
Macintosh OS
1
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for information
about the features that are available.
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems
Access to print-driver version numbers varies, depending on the operating system in which the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer is installed.
NOTE For a list of HP Color LaserJet 3600 print drivers, updated HP printing-system software,
and product-support information, go to:
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software
The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems support the
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver. If you are using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows Server 2003 environment, follow these steps to find driver-version information:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows
2000).
4. Right-click the printer icon.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the About tab.
The Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems support HP Traditional host-based driver.
If you are using an HP Traditional host-based driver, follow these steps to gain access to the print driver
version number:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
6. Click the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP Traditional host-based driver tabs:
Paper/Quality
Finishing
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer (continued)
24 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Effects
Basics
Color
Device Settings
Macintosh printing-system software
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for
Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later), which are provided with the operating system, and HP-created PPD files.
The driver uses these files to determine the features and postscript commands that the product supports.
Bidirectional support in AppleTalk connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The following
are components that can be installed:
The HP Color LaserJet Installer for Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later
SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ
The HP Printer Selector
Install notes
ENWW Printing-system software 25
Software description
Driver Configuration for Windows
The HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows and the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver feature
bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments, provide automatic discovery
and driver configuration for product accessories at the time of installation.
Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit and
optional paper trays.
Driver Autoconfiguration
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the
following circumstances:
Upon installation of a print driver, when using Enterprise Autoconfiguration (EAC)
When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection
when the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer is installed by using the Add Printer Wizard.
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Connection type Add Printer Wizard install Common installer
Network Yes Yes
Direct connection No Yes
Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the product
during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the
computer and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories
are connected to the product. Bidirectional communication depends on your network operating system
and on the type of connection you have between your computer and the HP Color LaserJet 3600. If the
connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept
commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer.
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration
functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on your
printing-system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes
EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product. Configuration
occurs without user interaction.
If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the pre-
existing bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectional-communication
software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the print driver with the
26 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update
Now feature is used.
If the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 changes after installation, the driver can be
automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication by using the Update Now feature. For more information, see Update Now.
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network
environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows Microsoft
Share
1
98 Me 2000 XP 2000/XP host
with 2000/XP
client
Installer Direct
connect
USB (DOT 4) x x
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x x x
Standard TCP/IP (HP) x x x
TCP/IP
(MS)
x x x
Add Printer Direct
connect
USB
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP
Standard TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP
(MS)
1
This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Server host
with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 3. Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client.
2
In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type Novell
Netware 4.x Netware 5.x
Bindery queue NDS queue Bindery queue
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x x x
Standard TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP (MS
1
)
1
Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare.
ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 27
Software description
Update Now
NOTE The Update Now feature is not available for the HP Traditional host-based driver.
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer since installation, the driver
can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
For example, if the HP Color LaserJet 3600 is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is
added later, you can use the Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match
the new product configuration.
The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears
on theDevice Settings tab if you are using the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver.
If you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver, you must select Update Now through
the Automatic Configuration setting in Device Settings tab.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000
or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system
software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments
can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the
network environment.
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or
print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured:
device settings and printing-preferences settings. The driver is configured to match the product
hardware so that gaining access to all of the product accessories through the driver is enabled correctly
(for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature settings can also be
configured.
HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories installed on the product, or
to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example, optional
trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: driver acquisition, driver preconfiguration,
and driver installation and deployment. These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending
on the tool that is being used to define the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three
are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are
packaged differently, either to support established product installation workflows or to leave the
28 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver
preconfiguration:
HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone
Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated
with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the
target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for
deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server
Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary Windows
software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/
hpdpc_sw
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queue-
creation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds
a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being
installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet
Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html
HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time mode
of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a
printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.
Detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools can be found in the HP Driver
Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available on the printing-system software CD.
For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are Off or On.
Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled.
Media Type. The options include all the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3600 supports
(see Media attributes in the Engineering Details chapter of this manual).
Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1, or Tray 2.
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been installed.
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to
the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred
when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if orientation
is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000, then the orientation setting
ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 29
Software description
automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or
Windows Server 2003. The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's
perspective and works only between drivers of identical product models.
NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the list is always the same
for those that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration
Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003
HP JetReady 4.2
host-based driver
N/A
1
N/A
1
Yes Yes Yes
HP Traditional hos
t-based driver
Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A
1
N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.
30 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that you can use to
determine whether you are using the correct and most current print driver for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer. Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic
Printer Check Tool:
1. Open an Internet browser.
2. Go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/drivercheck
1. Open an Internet browser.
2. go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/bsc
3. Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar.
4. Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.
When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the products that are currently installed on the
computer appear in a list. When you select the HP product that you would like to check, the HP Driver
Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and system setup in
order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver. The tool then verifies
whether you are using the latest driver, informs you if you are using an incorrect driver for the HP product,
and lets you know if an updated driver version is available for the product. If an updated driver is
available, you can download and install the latest driver version by clicking it.
The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can
analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the computer.
ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 31
Software description
HP Easy Printer Care
HP Easy Printer Care is a new standalone software program that manages from one to 15 printers. It
enables you to view the status of all HP printers, set up printer and status alerts, generate printer usage
reports, and reorder supplies.
NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care software is only available at the following Web
site:
http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
Installation options
The following methods are available for installing HP Easy Printer Care software:
Standalone installation, from the Web. This method is recommended for ensuring the latest
version of HP Easy Printer Care is installed. The software is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
CD Browser. From the main installation screen of the software CD, select HP Easy Printer
Care. This method is recommended in cases where HP Easy Printer Care software is the only
component you want to install.
Full installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. This method installs the full set
of drivers and software, including status, alerting, and troubleshooting tools (HP Easy Printer Care).
This method is recommended for computers in a direct-connect or a home/small network
environment.
Custom installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. HP Easy Printer Care is one
of the components that can be selected for installation.
Next Steps, during installation. After the drivers have been installed using the printing system
installer, a dialog appears that provides an opportunity to install HP Easy Printer Care, if it is not
already installed.
To install HP Easy Printer Care directly from the printing-system software CD, follow these steps:
1. Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
32 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
2. Click HP Easy Printer Care Software. The HP Easy Printer Care screen appears.
3. Click OK to proceed with the installation.
When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer over a direct USB or parallel connection by using
the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care is automatically installed when using the default
selections. Using this method, HP Easy Printer Care also discovers any HP printers that have been
installed on the computer over the network by selecting Find Other Printers in the HP Easy Printer
Care software.
When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer over a direct USB or parallel connection that does
not use a DOT4 port (for instance, by using the Add Printer Wizard), HP Easy Printer Care will not
discover the printer. For USB or parallel connections, you must install the printer driver using the installer
in order to the required DOT4 port installed.
When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer over a transmission control protocol/internet
protocol (TCP/IP) network connection by using the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care
is an option for a Custom Installation. It is not an option for a Basic Installation or a Full Installation over
a network.
HP Easy Printer Care is not supported over Novell Netware (IPX/SPX) network connections.
Access
To gain access to HP Easy Printer Care, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select All Programs.
3. Select Hewlett-Packard.
4. Select HP Easy Printer Care.
5. Click Start HP Easy Printer Care. The Easy Printer Care screen appears.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 33
Software description
Figure 2-2 HP Easy Printer Care – My HP Printers screen
If the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer is connected directly through a USB or parallel DOT4 port, an icon
appears for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 in the main pane of the Easy Printer Care screen (see Figure
2-2 HP Easy Printer Care – My HP Printers screen).
If the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer is connected over a network, click Find Other Printers.
Find Other Printers
When you click Find other Printers on the left pane, the Find Other Printers screen appears.
34 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-3 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers screen
If you know the printer's TCP/IP address, type the address in the Search for field. and click Next.
To conduct a search for printers over a network, select the General search (searches for all HP
printers on your network) option.
Click Advanced Search Properties to open a screen that allows you to select the number of “hops”
that the system makes. The Advanced Search Settings screen appears.
Click Cancel to return to the main HP Easy Printer Care screen.
Figure 2-4 Advanced Search Settings screen
When you click Next on the Find Other Printers screen, the Searching for printers, please wait..
screen appears.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 35
Software description
Figure 2-5 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Searching for printers, please wait.. screen
When a printer has been found, one of two screens appear, the Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found
screen or the Step 2 of 3: Select Printer screen. They are shown in the following figures.
the Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen appears.
Figure 2-6 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Verify Printer Found screen
If the results do not list the printer, click Previous to search again.
If the printer you want is listed, click Next. See Figure 2-8 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers
– Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen.
36 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-7 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen
Select the printer in the Available Printers pane and click the green double-arrows button. The model
name moves to the Printers to Add pane.
Click Next to add the printer. The Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen appears.
Figure 2-8 HP Easy Printer Care – Find Other Printers – Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen
Click the Alert Settings button to open the Alert Settings screen.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 37
Software description
Figure 2-9 HP Easy Printer Care – Alert Settings screen
Turn alert notification on and off by selecting an option in the Settings for field.
Under Printer Alerts, select the kind of alert notifications you want to receive:
Printer cannot print
Printer has a problem, but can continue
If you want to be notified of problems only when printing to the product, select Only if I am printing to
this printer (user mode).
If you are an administrator or are responsible for ordering printer supplies, select Anytime problems
occurs (maintainer mode)
Under Notification Method, select one of the following options:
Popup dialog
Desktop alert
Click Save to save your alert-notification settings. The My HP Printers screen appears.
38 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-10 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
My HP Printers screen – Overview tab
Click the printer icon to open the Overview tab.
Figure 2-11 HP Easy Printer Care – Overview tab
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 39
Software description
The Overview tab shows the following information under Device Status:
Printer name
Printer TCP/IP address
A graph showing usage for each color print cartridge
A list of any problems that require attention
Click the Help button ( ) to open the Overview Help screen.
The Overview Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status and Cartridges sections of the
Overview tab.
Under Supplies Status, the following information is provided about print media:
Location (by tray)
Type (media type)
Size (media size)
Status (OK, Out)
40 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Under Cartridges, the following information is provided for each color cartridge:
Print Cartridge (color)
Estimated Status (percentage)
Pages Remaining
HP Part Number
Click the Supplies Ordering button to open the Supplies Ordering screen.
Select each supply you want to order in the check box under Order. In the Quantity field, type the
number you want to order.
Click Print Shopping List if you want a hard-copy list of the supplies you are ordering.
Click Shop Online for Supplies if you have access to the Web and would like to place an online order.
The Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen appears.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 41
Software description
Figure 2-12 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen
If you click Yes, please send my printer information, only information and status about your printer
is sent; no personal information is shared. If you click No, let me provide my printer information, no
information is sent. The Welcome to HP SureSupply screen opens.
Figure 2-13 Welcome to HP SureSupply screen
On the Supplies Ordering page, click Cancel to return to the My HP Printers screen.
42 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
If the status of the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer changes after you have opened the HP Easy Printer
Care screen (for instance, if you have sent a print job to the product), click the refresh button ( ) in the
upper right corner of any screen where it appears.
HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab
In the My HP Printers screen, click the Support tab to open the Support screen.
Click the Help button ( ) to open the Support Help screen.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 43
Software description
The Support Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status, Maintenance Tools, and
Troubleshooting Tools sections of the Support tab.
Click the Supplies Ordering button to open the Supplies Ordering screen. The Transfer printer
information to HP InstantSupport? screen opens See Figure 2-12 Transfer printer information to HP
InstantSupport? screen and the following instructions to proceed with your order.
Maintenance Tools
The following tools are available in the Maintenance Tools pane:
Advanced Tools & Settings
Software Update
Click the Advanced Tools & Settings option to open the HP Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see HP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
If you have access to the internet, click Software Update to open the Web browser and find information
about the latest software for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer. The Welcome to HP Software Update
screen appears.
44 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Click Next to check for software updates. The Checking for updates... screen appears.
If software updates are available, a Web page opens with information about the updates. HP Software
Update finds updates for both drivers and for HP Easy Printer Care software.
You can also go directly to the following URL for software updates:
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software
In the Troubleshooting Tools panel, click Browse online information to find additional information
about the product on the HP Web site.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 45
Software description
In the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab, click Contact a support specialist to open a
Web page where you can supply information about the product and receive customized support. You
can send an instant message, an e-mail, or submit a problem and view the case status online. The page
also provides telephone numbers for HP customer care centers.
Troubleshooting Tools
The following tools are available in the Maintenance Tools pane:
Run online diagnostics
Browse online information
Contact a support specialist
You can use the Run online diagnostics tool to communicate with an HP Web site that analyzes the
product and looks for problems. When you click the Run online diagnostics option, the Transfer printer
information to HP InstantSupport screen appears. For more information about this screen, see Figure
2-12 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen
When you supply your printer information to HP, either automatically or manually, the HP Instant Support
screen appears.
Figure 2-14 HP InstantSupport screen
46 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 does not support the HP Embedded Web Server as in other HP LaserJet
products. However, users can view the HP EWS for the embedded Jetdirect print server by browsing
to the printer IP address.
A user can change language preferences and manage the network settings for the printer from the HP
Jetdirect EWS.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 47
Software description
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to your printer in Mac OS X.
The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later. The HP Printer Utility does not
work when it is installed using the AppleTalk protocol; it requires IP, Bonjour or Rendezvous.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
Access to the HP Printer Utility
Supplies Status
Device Information
HP Support
File Upload
Update Firmware
Duplex mode
Trays Configuration
Lock Resources
Network Settings
Rendezvous Setting
Supplies Management
Additional Settings
Access to the HP Printer Utility
In Mac OS X V10.3, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:
1. Open the Finder.
2. Find and double-click Printers. The Select Printer screen appears.
In Mac OS X V10.4, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:
1. Click Go.
2. Click Utilities.
3. Double-click HP Printer Selector. The Select Printer screen appears.
48 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-15 Select Printer screen — printer not selected
If your printer does not appear (as in the figure, click More Printers... . The Connection Type screen
appears.
Figure 2-16 Connection Type screen
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 49
Software description
Select your connection type (USB, TCP/IP, or AppleTalk). The product name appears under Device
Name.
On the Connection Type screen, click Add. The Select Printer screen appears, showing printer
information.
You can also select the printer and click Launch Utility to open the HP Printer Utility directly.
Figure 2-17 Select Printer screen — printer selected
On the Select Printer screen, click Settings... to open the Device Status screen on the HP Embedded
Web Server (HP EWS). For more information about the HP EWS, see HP Embedded Web Server in
this guide.
To open the HP Printer Utility, select your printer and click Launch Utility.
If the HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention, the Printer Status screen
appears.
50 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-18 Printer Status screen
Address the condition and click OK to close the screen. The HP Printer Utility opens.
The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility.
Supplies Status
The HP Printer Utility opens on the Supplies Status screen.
Figure 2-19 Supplies Status screen
Click Detailed Supplies Information... to open the Supplies Information screen.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 51
Software description
Figure 2-20 Supplies Information screen
Use the scroll button to see information about the color print cartridges.
If you have Internet access and click Order HP Supplies, a screen appears that explains the ordering
process and describes the kind of information that can be sent about your product to facilitate the
ordering of supplies.
Figure 2-21 Order Supplies link
Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows HP's privacy
statement.
52 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
You can continue ordering supplies without sending product information by clicking the continue
without sending this information link.
To send a message to HP, click the contact HP link.
On the Supplies Status screen, click Media to see the paper status in the trays.
Figure 2-22 Paper Status screen
You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Order HP Supplies.
Device Information
Click Device Information in the menu on the left to find the product service ID (if assigned), the firmware
version, and the serial number.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 53
Software description
Figure 2-23 Device Information screen
The product configuration page shows other settings; click Print Configuration Page to print it.
Click the printer icon in the lower left corner to see information about another installed printer. This action
relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another printer (see Figure 2-15 Select Printer
screen — printer not selected).
HP Support
Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen.
54 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-24 HP Online Support screen
If you have Internet access, you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen.
Click the Instant Support screen to open the HP Instant Support Web page.
Figure 2-25 HP Instant Support link
Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows HP's privacy
statement.
Click the Product Support link if you do not want to send information to HP but would like to receive
generic product support.
Click Continue to open a page where you can select your product and find further information about
product support.
Click Cancel to return to the HP Online Support screen in the HP Printer Utility.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 55
Software description
On the HP Online Support screen, click Order Supplies Online to open the Order Supplies Web page
(see Figure 2-21 Order Supplies link).
The Online Registration link is not available at this time.
File Upload
On the Configuration Settings menu, click File Upload to open the File Upload screen.
Figure 2-26 File Upload screen
The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the printer without first
opening them through a software program. Some files can be uploaded to the product, some cannot.
Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not
need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product by using the File Upload
command.
HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)
Portable Document Format (.PDF)
Postscript (.PS)
Text (.TXT)
On the File Upload screen, click the Choose... button to open a navigation screen. Locate the file you
want to upload and click Open.
On the File Upload screen, click the Display response from the device to see whether the upload
was successful. If the file loads successfully, no message is displayed.
On the navigation screen, select the file and click Open. The file name appears in the File Upload
screen of the HP Printer Utility. Click Upload.
56 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Update Firmware
Select Update Firmware to locate a firmware upgrade file and install it on your product. Browse to the
firmware file in the screen that appears and click Open. The Update Firmware screen shows the file
name. Click Update. For more information about performing remote firmware upgrades, see Remote
firmware updatein this guide.
Duplex mode
The Duplex mode screen is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-27 Duplex mode screen
For the HP Color LaserJet 3600dn printer model, the Configuration Settings menu includes a Duplex
Mode setting. Click this setting to open the Duplex Mode screen.
Use the Enable Duplex Mode command to print internal diagnostic and test pages on both sides of the
page.
1. Select Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen.
2. Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box. This box is clear by default.
3. Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page.
Trays Configuration
The Trays Configuration screen is shown in the following figure.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 57
Software description
Figure 2-28 Trays Configuration screen
1. Select Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your
product.
2. To change the media size, select a tray and then select a different media size in the Default Media
Size drop-down menu.
3. To change the media type, select a tray and then select a different media type in the Default Media
Type drop-down menu.
4. Click Apply Now to save the settings.
Lock Resources
Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP Color LaserJet 3600
58 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-29 Lock Resources screen
In the Control Panel Access Level, select one of the following settings:
No Locking. This provides full control of the product.
Minimal Locking. This provides control over paper-handling features.
Moderate Locking. This blocks changes in the product configuration.
Maximal Locking. This prevents users from changing product control-panel settings.
In the lower pane, select the Lock check box for the mass-storage unit you want to lock.
WARNING! Click Initialize selected mass-storage unit only if you want to erase all data that
are currently stored on the hard drive. You cannot undo this action.
Network Settings
Select Network Settings to open the IP Settings screen.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 59
Software description
Figure 2-30 IP Settings screen
Select one of the following options in the Configuration drop-down menu:
DHCP
BootP
Manual
You can also use this screen to modify the following settings:
Host Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
To save new settings, click Apply Now.
To view and change other network settings, click the Additional Network Settings button.
If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator.
For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
Rendezvous Setting
Select Rendezvous Setting to open the Rendezvous Setting screen. Rendezvous is enabled by
default.
To disable Rendezvous, clear the Enable Rendezvous check box and click Apply Now.
60 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-31 Rendezvous screen
The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop-down menu:
Port 9100 (default)
IPP
LPD-RAW
LPD-TEXT
LPD-AUTO
LPD-BINPS
LPD-Queue5
LPD-Queue6
LPD-Queue7
LPD-Queue8
LPD-Queue9
LPD-Queue10
After you select a new setting, click Apply Now to save it.
Supplies Management
Click Supplies Management in the Configuration Settings menu to open the Replace Supplies
screen.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 61
Software description
Figure 2-32 Replace Supplies screen
The settings on this screen prompt the printer to stop printing at a certain threshold (number of pages
in the media tray). By default, the Stop At Supply Out setting is selected.
To prompt the printer to stop printing at a higher threshold, select Stop at Supply Low and type a value
in the Low Threshold (0–100) field. When the number of sheets in the media tray reaches this value,
the printer stops printing.
You can also prompt the printer's behavior when the color print cartridges run out. By default, the
Continue Printing in Black-Only Mode is selected. To prompt the printer to stop instead of continuing
to print using the black cartridge, select Stop.
Click Apply Now to save new settings.
Additional Settings
Select Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS.
62 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
Figure 2-33 Additional Settings screen
To open the HP EWS, click Open Embedded Web Server.
For information about HP EWS settings, seeHP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded
Web Server User Guide.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 63
Software description
HP Web Jetadmin
Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected products within your
intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a
single network-administration server.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,
go to: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
64 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Software description
3 HP Traditional host-based driver for
Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 in
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers
in various operating systems, see Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems.
You can control print jobs from several places:
the product control panel
the software program print dialog box
the driver user interface
Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the
media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take
precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel
settings.
NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3600 print drivers, but you can
use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet
4650 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and color quality might be
compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied
for the product. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add
Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional host-based driver.
This chapter describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional host-based driver
Properties print-driver interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the HP Traditional host-
based driver interface for Windows 98 and Windows Me.
The chapter contains the following sections:
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
Help system
Paper/Quality tab features
Finishing tab features
ENWW Introduction 65
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Effects tab features
Basics tab features
Color tab features
Device Settings tab features
About tab features
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
Help system
Paper/Quality tab features
Finishing tab features
Effects tab features
Basics tab features
Color tab features
Device Settings tab features
About tab features
66 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access
to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1. Click File.
2. Click Print.
3. Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Properties driver tabs
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the
print drivers, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings
for all applications. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:
General tab
Details tab
Color Management tab
Sharing tab
Paper/Quality tab
Finishing tab
Effects tab
Basics tab
Color tab
Device Settings tab
About tab
ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me 67
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
NOTE Only the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, Basics, Color, Device Settings and
About tabs are described in this STR. These are product-specific HP driver tabs; the other driver
tabs are part of the operating system.
68 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Help system
The HP Traditional host-based driver includes a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with
printing and configuration options.
What's this? Help
What's this? Help is supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me. You can gain access to What's this?
Help messages in any of the following ways:
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Feature Unavailable messages
Feature Unavailable settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response
to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible
given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click
Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears asking
you to resolve this conflict.
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the
buttons is as follows:
Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting
control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made, and the control returns to its previous value.
ENWW Help system 69
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Paper/Quality tab features
To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab
to indicate different paper-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and
back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.
Figure 3-2 Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets
Paper Options
Document preview image
Print Quality
70 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they
are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab
affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print
Task Quick Sets settings:
Paper/Quality
Finishing
Effects
Basics
Color
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator
settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on).
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the
configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the
name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are
saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and click
Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. User-defined
Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
Default Print Settings
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that
existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that
are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been
changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver
Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 71
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3600
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
1
Use different paper
for
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Available, not
selected
No
Size is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Letter Yes
Source is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Automatically Select Yes
Type is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Plain Yes
Compression Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality group box Automatic No
Correct order for rear
bin
Finishing tab, Document Options group box Available, not
selected
No
Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Booklet layout is Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, Off Yes
Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group box 1Yes
Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes
Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Finishing tab, Rotate group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Print Document On Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not
selected; Letter
Yes
Scale to Fit Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
% of normal size Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, 100 Yes
Watermarks Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box (none) Yes
First Page Only
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark dialog box Unavailable Yes
Current Watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
Message Angle
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal Yes
Justified across page
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Selected Yes
Name (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Arial Yes
Color (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Gray Yes
72 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
1
Shading (watermark
font )
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Very Light Yes
Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
72 No
Style (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Regular Yes
Portrait Basics tab, Orientation group box Selected Yes
Landscape Basics tab, Orientation group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Front to Back Basics tab, Page Order group box Available, not
selected
No
Back to Front Basics tab, Page Order group box Selected No
Copy count Basics tab, Copies group box 1Yes
Print all text as black Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Print in grayscale Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not
selected
Yes
1
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go
to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
ON, ON, Booklet OFF, Pages per Sheet 2, Page Order - "Right, then Down"
Print On Both Sides is set to On
Flip Pages Up is set to On
Booklet Layout is set to Off
Pages per Sheet is set to 2
Page Order is set to Right then Down
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections
available by default.
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 (continued)
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 73
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Figure 3-3 Paper Options group box (default)
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use different paper for: check
box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the
following order:
Size is
Source Is
Type is
Use Different Paper For
Custom
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
NOTE When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from
an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media
size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size
media, any option that you select from the available Use different paper for: options must also use
Letter-size media.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally
best to use the driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such
as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media
sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product,
a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or choose another
tray.
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this manual.
74 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
When the Use different paper for: check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size
is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see
Use Different Paper For.
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper/
Quality tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use different paper for: is selected and any
setting other than First page is also selected.
Figure 3-4 Custom Paper Size dialog box
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains
one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper/Quality tab:
If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains
the name of that custom size.
If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default
name Custom 1 – 5 for a custom media size.
NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for
example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4 inches
by 11 inches).
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not
against the standard media-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and
capabilities are discussed in the Save, Delete, or Rename section.
Name
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently.
Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to
type a new name for a custom media size.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 75
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following
conditions:
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls
in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name
of the last selected custom media size.
If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or
if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default
name of "Custom 1 – 5."
If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new
size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a
saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click the Save button, you can
change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is
selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and
replaced by the values of the selected custom media size.
Save, Delete, or Rename
The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save, Delete, and Rename.
Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most
recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button
causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names.
If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you
click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the
Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared
only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size
names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.
Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size
appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the drop-
down menu or clicking the Save button. Clicking the Delete button causes the saved custom media
size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and
width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.
Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting
an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name
of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu.
The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command
button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
Table 3-2 Name drop-down menu text strings
State Drop-down menu
contents
Button label Action Next state
1Custom 1 – 5 Save Click Save. 3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2
Change the width or height values. 1
76 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
State Drop-down menu
contents
Button label Action Next state
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
2<user-typed text> Save Click Save. 3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2
Change the width or height values. 2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
3<name of saved item> Delete Click Delete. 1
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4
Change the width or height values. 1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
4 <user-typed text> Rename Click Rename (when the name is unique). 3
Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate). 4
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4
Change the width or height values. 2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
Custom size (width and height controls)
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by
using the up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the
maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole
millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated
when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current
measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the
increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the
values change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the
measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic
Measurement Units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the
maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for
each media-handling device.
Table 3-2 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 77
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Table 3-3 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 2 2500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Dynamic measurement units
Use the Dynamic Measurement Units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending
on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in
inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in
millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types.
Close
The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic in the following table.
In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while
the dialog box is open will remain in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper/Quality tab. The
following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
Table 3-4 Close dialog box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains And the button says Then this happens when the Close
button is clicked
Custom 1 – 5 Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom button
was clicked.
<user-typed text> Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom button
was clicked.
<name of saved item> Delete The dialog box closes, and the current
media size is set to the size that was last
shown in the drop-down menu.
<user-typed text> Rename The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
78 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
If the drop-down menu contains And the button says Then this happens when the Close
button is clicked
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom button
was clicked.
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been
installed on the product:
Automatically select
Manual Feed in Tray 1
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3600
uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray
other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For more information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this STR.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3600 supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually
Plain.
The following standard types appear in the list:
Unspecified
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Table 3-4 Close dialog box text strings (continued)
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 79
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Light 60-75 g/m
2
Envelope
Heavy Glossy 120-160 g/m
2
Heavy 105–120 g/m
2
Cardstock 164–220 g/m
2
Glossy 106-120 g/m
2
Tough Paper
The default setting is Plain, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting,
make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a
control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or choose another tray.
For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR.
Use Different Paper For
You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use different paper for:
options.
When you select the Use different paper for: check box, the following settings can appear in the group
box, along with associated options:
First Page
Other Pages
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use different paper
for: options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is: driver setting
becomes unavailable for all of the other Use different paper for: options. Therefore, the First
Page settings are described first in the following sections.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain
configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use different paper for: setting is described in the following sections.
First Page
Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use different paper for: check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.
80 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Figure 3-5 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
Size is: drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting
becomes unavailable for all the other Use different paper for: options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source Is
section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First
Page) for the other pages of the document.
The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 81
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Figure 3-6 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
Source is: drop-down menu
Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source Is
section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects,
Basics, and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the
image. The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The
horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes.
Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Print Quality
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 print driver Print Quality group box provides access to the
Compression feature
82 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Use the Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:
Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.
Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless
means that no data is lost during compression.)
Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always use a lossy
compression method (some data is lost).
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 83
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and
to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab.
Figure 3-7 The default Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets
Document Options
Document preview image
Rotate
84 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Paper/Quality tab features.
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
Correct order for rear bin
Print on Both Sides (Manually)
Flip Pages Up
Booklet layout is
Pages per Sheet
Print Page Borders
Page Order is
Correct order for rear bin
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 3600 does not support this feature. The printing-system software
does support this feature in other products, but when this feature is selected for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600, the control is ignored.
The default setting for the Correct order for rear bin option is off (not selected).
Use this feature to order your pages correctly for the output bin.
Print on Both Sides (Manually)
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides (Manually) option is off (not selected). Select the Print
on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for a print job.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is used
to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. The
following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation that
is selected on the Basics tab.
Table 3-5 Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding
Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding
ENWW Finishing tab features 85
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding
along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the
lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on
the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout is
The Booklet layout is drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported
media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper/Quality tab. The Booklet layout
is drop-down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off.
The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set
on the Paper/Quality tab.
Left edge binding
Right edge binding
When you select Left edge binding or Right edge binding, the document preview image changes to
show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16
pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. For more information, see the Pages per Sheet section
of this STR.
Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the
media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.
The Booklet layout is drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.
% of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.
Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer supports both book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages and that can have a different media type for the
front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the First Page and Other Pages
settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use different paper for check box)
to select different printing options for the book. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features of
this chapter.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet
that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet layout is drop-down menu on the Finishing tab
to control booklet settings.
To print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1. In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Finishing tab.
86 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
3. Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
4. In the Booklet layout is drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The
booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Left
edge binding).
5. Click OK in the print driver.
6. Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Figure 3-8 Printing a booklet
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet
of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-
down menu provides six settings:
1 page per sheet (default)
2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
ENWW Finishing tab features 87
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and
Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
Page Order is
The Page Order is drop-down menu contains four selections:
Right, then Down
Down, then Right
Left, then Down
Down, then Left
The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following figure.
Figure 3-9 Page-order preview images
2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
Finishing
Effects
Paper
88 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Basics
Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The
horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes.
Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Rotate
Click to select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box to create a landscape or portrait orientation in
which the image is rotated 180° degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media. If you
select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
ENWW Finishing tab features 89
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Effects tab.
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure
shows the Effects tab.
Figure 3-10 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets
Resizing Options
Document preview image
Watermarks
90 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Paper/Quality tab features.
Resizing Options
The Resizing options group box contains the following controls:
Print Document On
Scale to Fit
% of Normal Size
Print Document On
Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on
a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
% of Normal Size is not 100.
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source,
and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is
automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to
fit on the selected media size.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target
media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is
turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on
the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is
clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure
shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On
option selected and the target size specified as Letter.
Figure 3-11 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
ENWW Effects tab features 91
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in
relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting
in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected
within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does
not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and
sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from
the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator
is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll
bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by
10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution;
use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the value that you want, and then use the scroll bar arrows
to refine the value. Or, type the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Properties driver tabs except
the About and Device Settings tabs (the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, Basics, and Color tabs).
For more information about the document preview image, see Paper/Quality tab features.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or
edit an existing watermark.
The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:
Watermarks
First Page Only
Edit...
92 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Watermarks
The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
(none)
Confidential
DO NOT COPY
Draft
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting.
Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.
First Page Only
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The
First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Edit...
Click Edit..., and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Figure 3-12 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark
and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
ENWW Effects tab features 93
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:
NOTE This section also contains information about default watermark settings.
Current Watermarks
Watermark Message
Message Angle
Options
Document preview image
Font Attributes
Default watermark settings
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help
message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs,
the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number
is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number
increases until the name is unique.
94 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the
page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the
lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-;eft and mid-right
edges of the page.
Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric
spin box to select the angle.
Options
Use the Options group box to select the Justified across page check box. When you select the
Justified across page check box, to automatically center the watermark string within the page using
the angle selected in the Message Angle group box. The Justified across page check box is selected
by default.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The
document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The
default is language-dependent.
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:
Gray
Red
Yellow
Green
Cyan
Blue
Magenta
Shading
ENWW Effects tab features 95
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
Lightest
Very Light (default)
Light
Medium Light
Medium
Medium Dark
Dark
Very Dark
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly
saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select
Darkest to produce a black watermark.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is language-
dependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
Style
The following settings are available:
Regular
Bold
Italic
Bold Italic
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
Table 3-6 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks
Setting New watermark Preset watermark
Name Arial Varies by language
Color Gray Gray
Shading Very Light Very Light
Size 80 Varies by language
Style Regular Regular
96 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking
Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a
different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
ENWW Effects tab features 97
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Basics tab features
To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Basics tab.
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation
of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
Figure 3-13 Basics tab
The Basics tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets
Orientation
Page order
Copies
98 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Paper/Quality tab features.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media
is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations
are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image.
Page order
Use the options in the Page order group box to determine the order in which your print job will print.
The following options are available:
Front to back. Use this option to print page one of your print job first.
Back to front. Use this option to print page one of your print job last.
Copies
Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number
by typing in the Copy Count text box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box.
Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer. The copies value will
not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the
maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the
Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or
numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the
box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not
take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in
the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It
is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
ENWW Basics tab features 99
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Use the Collate check box option to when you want to produce multiple collated copies of your print
job.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of
each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings
in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word,
the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the
Collate check box in the Basics tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes
precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated
printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the
Collate check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program,
the printed output is uncollated.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Properties driver tabs except
the About and Device Settings tabs (the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, Basics, and Color tabs).
For more information about the document preview image, see Paper/Quality tab features.
100 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Color tab features
To gain access to the Color tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Color tab.
Use the Color tab to print all text as black or to convert color output to grayscale. The Color tab is shown
in the following figure.
Figure 3-14 Color tab
The Color tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets
Color Options
Document preview image
ENWW Color tab features 101
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Paper/Quality tab features.
Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color
Options group box contains the following controls:
Print all text as black
Print in Grayscale
Print all text as black
Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is unselected by default. When you click the check box to select
this option, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is
printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing
reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page,
nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Print in Grayscale
Select Print in Grayscale to print a document in black and white. This option is useful for previewing
preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output quickly or for printing color documents that will be
photocopied or faxed.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Properties driver tabs except
the About and Device Settings tabs (the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, Basics, and Color tabs).
For more information about the document preview image, see Paper/Quality tab features.
102 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Device Settings tab features
To gain access to the Device Settings tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Settings tab.
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the printer hardware configuration.
The Device Settings tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking
Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Device Settings tab is not visible
(with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the
Printers folder, the Device Settings tab looks like the following figure.
Figure 3-15 Configure tab
The Configure tab contains the following controls:
Paper Handling Options
ENWW Device Settings tab features 103
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
Paper Handling Options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:
Allow Manual Duplexing
Allow scaling from large paper
Optional Paper Sources
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except
transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the
input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
Allow scaling from large paper
Click to select the Allow scaling from large paper check box to enable printing from paper sizes that
are larger than the printer supports. The print job is automatically scaled to a size that the printer does
support. When selected, you can choose larger paper sizes from the Size is list on the Paper/Quality
tab.
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on your printer , its
input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Device Settings tab.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
Blank (nothing selected). This is the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
Tray 3
104 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
About tab features
To gain access to the About tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the printer name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the About tab.
The About tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-16 About tab
The About tab provides the following information:
Printer name
Print driver version number
Copyright information
ENWW About tab features 105
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
106 Chapter 3 HP Traditional host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional host-
based driver for Windows
4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for
Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows 2000,
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit).
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program print
dialog box, and the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one
location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established
in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override
product control-panel settings.
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP Traditional host-based driver and the
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver in various operating systems, see the Driver-feature
comparison in various operating systems section of this manual.
When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003,
the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver is installed by default.
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Access to print drivers
Help system
Advanced tab features
Paper/Quality tab features
Effects tab features
Finishing tab features
Color tab features
Services tab
Device Settings
About tab
ENWW Introduction 107
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access
to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1. Click File
2. Click Print.
3. Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
You can also control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of
driver tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the
Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable
options can be configured in Properties driver tabs.
Printing Preferences driver tabs
The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software
programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:
Advanced
Paper/Quality
Effects
Finishing
Color
Services
Properties driver tabs
This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties
tabs, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
108 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:
General
Sharing
Ports
Advanced
Color Management
Security
Device Settings
About
ENWW Access to print drivers 109
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Help system
The HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver includes a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with
printing and configuration options.
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support "What's this?" Help. You can gain
access to "What's this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible print settings might produce unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific
selections. These messages alert you that the selections are illogical or impossible given the capabilities
of the printer or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept
some settings that are illogical or impossible for the printer to perform. Sending a job with
incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check
the product documentation for the product capabilities.
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically
invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for instance, is not possible
when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print
Settings message.
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message
110 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Clicking the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option button and then clicking OK accepts
the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is
compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict
myself and then click OK.
NOTE In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when
the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the product.
ENWW Help system 111
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Advanced tab features
To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Advanced tab.
You can use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special
controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in
the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or
through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
Paper/Output
112 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Graphic
Document Options
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output setting contains the Copy Count control.
Copy Count
Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs
that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count
in the software program.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number
by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are
numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP Color LaserJet 3600. The copies value will not advance from the
maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number
(9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab,
invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater
than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default
number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not
take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in
the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It
is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes
available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of
each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings
in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word,
the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the
Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes
precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated
printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the
Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software
program, the printed output is uncollated.
Graphic
The Graphic setting contains the Image Color Management controls.
Image Color Management
This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics.
ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before
ENWW Advanced tab features 113
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images when
they are printed. The following options are available:
ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print your color graphics.
To enable Image Color Management, click the option and then select ICM Enabled.
If you want the host computer to perform calculations for color matching before it sends the
document to the product, click ICM Handled by Host System.
If you want the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer to perform calculations for color matching, click
ICM Handled by Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and
downloaded to the product. The product uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.
If you want the printer to perform calculations for color matching, click ICM Handled by Printer
by using printer calibration. Because the set of rules for mapping the colors has already been
downloaded to the product (which must be postscript language level 2 or higher), they will not
be created or downloaded again.
ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the image
that looks best on the printed page.
If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, click Graphics.
For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, click Pictures to maximize the
contrast.
If your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the
document to a product that has that specific color of ink, click Proof.
If you want to preview the color settings from another product, click Match.
Document Options
The Document Options setting contains the following controls:
Advanced Printing Features
Printer Features
Layout Options
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,
depending on your printer. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the
default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some
advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been
disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the
Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.
Printer Features
The Printer Features setting contains the Raster Compression control.
114 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:
Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.
Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless
means that no data is lost during compression.)
Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always use a lossy
compression method (some data is lost).
Layout Options
The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting.
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints
the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual
logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than
one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.
ENWW Advanced tab features 115
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Paper/Quality tab features
To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab
to indicate different media-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and
back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab
116 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets
Paper Options
Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any change
to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects most of the
Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing, and Color tabs) because
they are all the same control.
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced andServices tabs, where the setting is not
available). Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined
printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets
control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. User-defined
Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
Default Print Settings
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that
existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that
are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been
changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no
other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings
match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label
that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the HP Driver
Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3600
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
1
Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Available, not selected Yes
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 117
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
1
Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Booklet Layout Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable, Off Yes
Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
1 page per sheet Yes
Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable Yes
Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable Yes
Orientation Finishing tab, Orientation group box Portrait Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes
Resizing Options Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes
Print document on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Size to print on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes
Scale to Fit Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Unavailable, selected Yes
% of Normal Size Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Watermarks Effects tab (none) Yes
Watermarks First
Page Only
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Current watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
Watermark
Message
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
Watermark
Message Angle
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal Yes
Watermark
Message Angle
(angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable unless
the Angle option is
selected, 52
Yes
Watermark Font
Name
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Arial Yes
Watermark Font
Color
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Gray Yes
Watermark Font
Shading
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Very Light Yes
Watermark Font
Size
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
80 No
Watermark Font
Style
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Regular Yes
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 (continued)
118 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
1
Size is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Letter Yes
Use Different Paper/
Covers
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Available, not selected No
Source is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Automatically Select Yes
Type is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Unspecified Yes
Automatic (color
options)
Color tab, Color Options group box Selected Yes
Manual (color
options)
Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Print in Grayscale Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Edge Control Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Off Yes
1
These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See HP Driver
Preconfiguration, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified.
On the Finishing tab, Print on Both Sides is set to ON.
On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up is set to ON.
On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet.
On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down.
Type new Quick Set name here
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save
the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type
the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are
saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and
click Delete.
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 (continued)
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 119
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. User-defined
Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections
that are available by default.
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:
Size is
Custom Paper Size
Source Is
Type is
Use Different Paper/Covers
120 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a
gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to
use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include
a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not
require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media
sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product,
a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or choose another
tray.
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this manual.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the
Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information,
see the Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter of the manual.
Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom... button on the Paper/
Quality tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 121
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/
Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size.
If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box
shows the default name of "Custom."
If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or
renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved
or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click the Save button, you can change
the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking
the Save button, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
Paper size
The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper
Size group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the
maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole
millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated
when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current
measurement units.
Units
To change measurement units, select one of the radio buttons in the Units group box (either Inches or
Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the
maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for
each media-handling device.
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 2 (500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
122 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been
installed on the product:
Automatically select
Printer Auto Select
Manual Feed in Tray 1
Tray 1 (500-sheet multipurpose tray)
Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3600
uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray
other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this manual.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3600 supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually
Plain.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can
be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the
product when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the
information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled,
then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional
communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the
driver.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
Unspecified
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued)
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 123
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Light (60–75 g/m
2
, or 16.4 - 20.5 lb.)
Intermediate (90 - 104 g/m
2
, or 24.7 - 28.5 lb.)
Heavy (105 - 120 g/m
2
, or 28.8 - 32.9 lb.)
Extra Heavy (120 - 163 g/m
2
, or 32.9 - 44.7 lb.)
Glossy (75 - 120 g/m
2
, or 20.5 - 32.9 lb.)
Cardstock (164 - 220 g/m
2
, or 45 - 60.3 lb.)
Rough (90 - 105 g/m
2
, or 24.7 - 28.8 lb.)
Heavy Glossy (120 - 160 g/m
2
, or 32.9 - 43.9 lb.)
Extra Heavy Glossy (160 - 220 g/m
2
, or 43.9 - 58 lb.)
Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
Envelope
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is:
setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this manual.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a
control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or choose another tray.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the
group box, along with the associated options:
Front Cover
First Page
Other Pages
Last Page
Back Cover
124 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include
a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options.
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options
The following are the Front Cover options:
Size is: drop-down menu
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
Source is: drop-down menu
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus
become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 125
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting,
see the Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of this
chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain
configured until you close the software program.
First Page
Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document.
The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use
Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-7 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
Size is: drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source Is
section of this chapter.
126 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
Size is: drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source Is
section of this chapter.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 127
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-9 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
Size is: drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
128 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include
a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options.
Figure 4-10 Back Cover setting
The following are the Back Cover options:
Size is: drop-down menu
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
Source is: drop-down menu
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus
become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would
otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 129
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the
image.
130 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Effects tab.
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure
shows the Effects tab.
Figure 4-11 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets group box
Resizing Options group box
ENWW Effects tab features 131
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Document preview image
Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this manual.
Resizing options
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
Actual Size (default)
Print Document On setting
Scale to Fit option
% of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Select the Print Document On radio button to format the document for one media size and then print
the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source
and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is
automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to
fit on the selected media.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the
target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting
is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size
on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image
is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview
images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected,
and the target size specified as Letter.
132 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Figure 4-12 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the
target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default
setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected
within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does
not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and
sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upper-
left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator
is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows
increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution;
use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the value you want, and then use the scroll bar arrows to
refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the
image.
ENWW Effects tab features 133
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only),
or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
(none)
Confidential
Draft
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system,
plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any
watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the
document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
Figure 4-13 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However,
clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select
a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
134 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the
Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details
dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning
appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to
keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When
this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2).
When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then
the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the
page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the
lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right
edges of the page.
Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric
spin box to select the angle.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
ENWW Effects tab features 135
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is
language-dependent.
Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:
Gray
Red
Yellow
Green
Cyan
Blue
Magenta
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
Lightest
Very Light (default)
Light
Medium Light
Medium
Medium Dark
Dark
Very Dark
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. A choice of Light produces a lightly
saturated gray watermark. A choice of Lightest produces the lightest shade of watermark;
Darkest produces a black watermark.
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is language-
dependent. The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-
down menu.
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
136 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks
Setting New watermark Preset watermark
Name Arial Varies by language
Color Gray Gray
Shading Very Light Very Light
Size 80 Varies by language
Style Regular Regular
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking
Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a
different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
ENWW Effects tab features 137
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the
Finishing tab.
Figure 4-14 Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
Print Task Quick Sets group box
Document Options group box
138 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Document preview image
Orientation group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this manual.
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
Print on Both Sides check box
Flip Pages Up option
Booklet Layout drop-down menu
Pages per Sheet drop-down menu
Print Page Borders check box
Page Order drop-down menu
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any type except Transparency, Labels, or Envelope.
Size is: is set to any size except Double Japan Postcard Rotated, Envelope #10, Envelope B5,
Envelope C5, Envelope DL, Envelope Monarch, or Statement.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the printer prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3600dn printer comes with a duplexing
unit installed.
These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing
performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going
through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on
both sides, such as labels and transparencies, and the following media types:
Prepunched
Preprinted
Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
ENWW Finishing tab features 139
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make
adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer
to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best
possible quality. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each
media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic.
Manually printing on both sides
Manually Print on 2nd Side is not selected
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for
the HP Color LaserJet 3600 and HP Color LaserJet 3600n printer models, which do not have a
duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer models for media types that are not available when using the
automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6, PCL
5, or the PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled
in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for
automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, 8.5 x 13, and Executive (JIS) only), and forces manual
printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.
Select the media type that corresponds to the media you are using for the print job. The following
media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Bond
Recycled
Colored
Rough
NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document
options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties
print-driver tabs. See Installable Options in the Device Settings section of this chapter.
If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported by automatic
duplexing, you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided
Printing) option on the Device Settings tab.
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but there is no change to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
140 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1. Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2. Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3. When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which
the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints
on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support
odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages
Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, The following
table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation selected on the
Finishing tab.
Table 4-4 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding
Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding
along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the
lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on
the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
ENWW Finishing tab features 141
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu
is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that
is set on the Paper/Quality tab.
Left Edge Binding
Right Edge Binding
When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to
show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it
automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Pages per Sheet section of this
chapter for more information.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,
Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use
Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other pages, and
back cover. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features of this chapter.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
To print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1. Click File.
2. Click Print.
3. Click Properties.
4. Click the Finishing tab.
5. Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
6. In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for
example, Right Edge Binding).
7. Click OK in the print driver.
8. Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
142 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet
of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-
down menu provides six settings:
1 page per sheet (this is the default)
2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
NOTE When you select an option other than 2 pages per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
Right, then Down
Down, then Right
Left, then Down
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following figure.
Figure 4-15 Page-order preview images
2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
ENWW Finishing tab features 143
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
Paper/Quality
Effects
Finishing
Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media
is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations
are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180° degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If
you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
144 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Color tab features
To gain access to the Color tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Color tab.
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments. Color
output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-16 Color tab
The Color tab contains the following sets of controls:
Print Task Quick Sets group box
Color Options group box
ENWW Color tab features 145
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Color Themes group box
Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store
the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either
preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more
information, see Paper/Quality tab features.
Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print
job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:
Automatic option (default)
Manual option
Settings button (that opens the Color Settings dialog box)
Print in Grayscale check box
Automatic
Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The
Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing needs.
Manual
To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click the Settings button. The
Color Settings dialog box appears.
To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings
dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Custom"
settings.
146 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Figure 4-17 Color Settings dialog box
The Color Settings dialog box contains the Generalgroup box.
General
Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.
Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:
Adaptive Halftoning, Trapping, and Color Resolution Enhancement technology (C-REt). Adaptive
Halftoning increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by
slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. C-REt increases the apparent resolution by placing
each dot for the smoothest edges.
The Edge Control option offers four settings:
Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.
Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is
set to On.
Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to
On, and C-REt is set to On.
Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On,
and C-REt is set to On.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
ENWW Color tab features 147
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
Paper/Quality
Effects
Finishing
Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
148 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Services tab
To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Services tab.
The Services tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-18 Services tab
ENWW Services tab 149
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following
selections:
Online diagnostic tools. This is the HP Instant Support Web site, where you can find interactive
tools and contacts for troubleshooting.
Support and troubleshooting. This is the main Web site for HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer
support.
Product manuals. View or download HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer manuals.
Check for driver updates. Automatically check your print drivers to see whether the correct and
most up-to-date print drivers are installed.
Order supplies. Shop online for HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer supplies.
If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web
page.
150 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Device Settings
The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device
Settings tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Settings tab.
Available options depend on the feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab.
Figure 4-19 Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP Color LaserJet 3600.
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
Form to Tray Assignment options
Installable Options options
ENWW Device Settings 151
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form (which
defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a source, you
can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.
This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory
trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1. Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2. Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4. Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Cancel button to reconfigure all the
trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600. The following controls are available:
Automatic Configuration (Off by default)
Tray 3
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
Allow Manual Duplexing
Printer Memory
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If
bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an
automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is
unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
152 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
If you have more than one driver installed on your product, the Update Now feature works automatically
only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the
default setting for your product model.
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have tray 3, an additional 500-sheet tray, installed on your product.
The default setting is Not Installed.
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
The HP Color LaserJet 3600dn printer models comes with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled
(Installed) by default.
NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing
feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through
the duplexing unit if there is printable information on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except
transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the
input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
This setting is enabled by default.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept. The
driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
ENWW Device Settings 153
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
About tab
The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties,
click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers
and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the About tab.
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in
parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.
The information varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 3600 model number, driver, date, and
versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-20 About tab
The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates
whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver
was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
154 Chapter 4 HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows ENWW
HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver for Windows
5 Installing Windows printing-system
components
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For
detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer, see Supported operating systems
This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-
system software for Windows operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:
Windows
Font support
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems
Installing from the printing-system CD
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Detailed Windows installation
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
Setting a default printer
NOTE If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the
corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.
ENWW Introduction 155
Installation in Windows
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts
that are available on the CD that came with the product.
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing product:
Arial
Courier New Italic
Times New Roman Italic
Arial Italic
Courier New Bold
Times New Roman Bold
Arial Bold
Courier New Bold Italic
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Arial Bold Italic
Symbol
Wingdings
Courier New
Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3600
printing-system software.
Table 5-1 Default fonts
Font name Font style File name
Albertus Extra Bold Regular ALBR85W.TTF
Albertus Medium Regular ALBR55W.TTF
Antique Olive Regular OLVR55W.TTF
Antique Olive Bold OLVR75W.TTF
Antique Olive Italic OLVR56W.TTF
CG Omega Regular CGOR45W.TTF
CG Omega Bold CGOR65W.TTF
156 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Font name Font style File name
CG Omega Bold Italic CGOR66W.TTF
CG Omega Italic CGOR46W.TTF
CG Times Regular CGTR45W.TTF
CG Times Bold CGTR65W.TTF
CG Times Bold Italic CGTR66W.TTF
CG Times Italic CGTR46W.TTF
Clarendon Condensed Bold CLAR67W.TTF
Coronet Regular CORONET.TTF
CourierPS Regular CPSR45W.TTF
CourierPS Bold CPSR65W.TTF
CourierPS Bold Oblique CPSR66W.TTF
CourierPS Oblique CPSR46W.TTF
Garamond Antiqua GARR45W.TTF
Garamond Halbfett GARR65W.TTF
Garamond Kursiv GARR46W.TTF
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett GARR66W.TTF
Helvetica® Regular HELR45W.TTF
Helvetica Bold HELR65W.TTF
Helvetica Bold Oblique HELR66W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Regular HELR47W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold HELR67W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique HELR68W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Oblique HELR48W.TTF
Helvetica Oblique HELR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book AVGR45W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique AVGR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Regular AVGR65W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique AVGR66W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light Regular BOKR35W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light Italic BOKR36W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi Regular BOKR75W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi Italic BOKR76W.TTF
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CHANC___.TTF
ITC Zapf Dingbats Regular DINGS___.TTF
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
ENWW Font support 157
Installation in Windows
Font name Font style File name
Letter Gothic Regular LETR45W.TTF
Letter Gothic Bold LETR65W.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic LETR46W.TTF
Marigold Regular MARIGOLD.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold NCSR75W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic NCSR76W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Italic NCSR56W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Roman NCSR55W.TTF
Palatino Bold PALR65W.TTF
Palatino Bold Italic PALR66W.TTF
Palatino Italic PALR46W.TTF
Palatino Roman PALR45W.TTF
SymbolPS Regular SYMPS__.TTF
Times* Bold TIMR65W.TTF
Times Bold Italic TIMR66W.TTF
Times Italic TIMR46W.TTF
Times Roman TIMR45W.TTF
Univers Bold UNVR65W.TTF
Univers Bold Italic UNVR66W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold UNVR67W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold Italic UNVR68W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium UNVR57W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium Italic UNVR58W.TTF
Univers Medium UNVR55W.TTF
Univers Medium Italic UNVR56W.TTF
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts
Font name Font style File name
Albertus MT Regular PS_12639.TTF
Albertus MT Italic PS_12640.TTF
Albertus MT Lt Regular PS_14530.TTF
Antique Olive CompactPS Regular PS_11120.TTF
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
158 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Font name Font style File name
Antique Olive Roman Regular PS_11119.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Bold PS_11118.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Italic PS_11846.TTF
Apple Chancery Italic PS_24516.TTF
Bodoni Poster Regular PS_12704.TTF
Bodoni PosterCompressed Regular PS_14508.TTF
BodoniPS Regular PS_12581.TTF
BodoniPS Bold PS_12585.TTF
BodoniPS Bold Italic PS_12586.TTF
BodoniPS Italic PS_12582.TTF
Candid Regular PS_24517.TTF
Chicago Regular PS_24518.TTF
Clarendon Light Regular PS_14513.TTF
ClarendonPS Regular PS_10269.TTF
ClarendonPS Bold PS_12968.TTF
Cooper Black Regular PS_10369.TTF
Cooper Black Italic PS_10370.TTF
Copperplate32bc Regular PS_14514.TTF
Copperplate33bc Regular PS_14515.TTF
CoronetPS Italic PS_10249.TTF
Eurostile Regular PS_10267.TTF
Eurostile Bold Regular PS_10268.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo Bold PS_14512.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo Regular PS_14511.TTF
Geneva Regular PS_24509.TTF
GillSans Regular PS_13872.TTF
GillSans Bold PS_13874.TTF
GillSans Bold Italic PS_13875.TTF
GillSans Condensed Regular PS_14053.TTF
GillSans Condensed Bold PS_14054.TTF
GillSans ExtraBold Regular PS_14051.TTF
GillSans Italic PS_13873.TTF
GillSans Light Italic PS_13871.TTF
GillSans Light Regular PS_13870.TTF
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
ENWW Font support 159
Installation in Windows
Font name Font style File name
Goudy Bold PS_12544.TTF
Goudy Bold Italic PS_10695.TTF
Goudy Regular PS_12542.TTF
Goudy ExtraBold Regular PS_12545.TTF
Goudy Italic PS_12543.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Regular PS_14526.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold PS_14528.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic PS_14529.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Italic PS_14527.TTF
Hoefler Text Regular PS_24519.TTF
Hoefler Text Black Regular PS_24521.TTF
Hoefler Text Black Italic PS_24522.TTF
Hoefler Text Italic PS_24520.TTF
Hoefler Text Ornaments Regular PS_24523.TTF
Joanna MT Regular PS_14503.TTF
Joanna MT Bold PS_14505.TTF
Joanna MT Bold Italic PS_14506.TTF
Joanna MT Italic PS_14504.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic PS_13778.TTF
Letter GothicPS Regular PS_13777.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold PS_13779.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold Italic PS_13780.TTF
Lubalin Graph Regular PS_12675.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold PS_12677.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold Italic PS_12625.TTF
Lubalin Graph Italic PS_12623.TTF
MarigoldPS Regular PS_94073.TTF
Mona Lisa Recut Regular PS_14525.TTF
Monaco Regular PS_24524.TTF
New York Regular PS_24510.TTF
Optima Regular PS_12506.TTF
Optima Bold PS_12510.TTF
Optima Bold Italic PS_12511.TTF
Optima Italic PS_12507.TTF
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
160 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Font name Font style File name
Oxford Italic PS_14072.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Italic PS_11546.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Regular PS_11545.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold PS_11547.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic PS_11548.TTF
Taffy Regular PS_14507.TTF
Univers 45 Light Regular PS_13501.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold PS_14023.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold Italic PS_14024.TTF
Univers 45 Light Italic PS_13502.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold PS_14030.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold Italic PS_14040.TTF
Univers 55 Regular PS_14021.TTF
Univers 55 Italic PS_14022.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed Regular PS_14029.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed Italic PS_14039.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Bold PS_13548.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Regular PS_13547.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic PS_14481.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Italic PS_14480.TTF
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
ENWW Font support 161
Installation in Windows
Installation instructions
The following sections provide instructions for installing the printer drivers on various Windows operating
systems.
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating
systems
Installation is similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating
systems. The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
NOTE The HP Traditional host-based driver and the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver are
available on the printing-system software CD. For more information, see the Installing print drivers
by using Add Printer section in this chapter.
If the HP Color LaserJet 3600 is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software
must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP LaserJet
printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication and some
driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems.
For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the
software.
When the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always
added to the system.
Installing from the printing-system CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing system from the CD that came
with your product.
1. Close all programs that are open on your computer.
2. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If your CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to
and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3. Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printing-
system files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the
printing-system software file.
1. Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3. Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For detailed
installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation.
162 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose
to install the software by using either a Basic, Full, or a Custom Installation.
Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons
Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions and explanations about the
installation process.
Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific
dialog box depends on your previous selections.
After you select any options on a given screen, click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the
installation sequence.
To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any installation
dialog box.
1. When you click the Cancel button, a dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are
you sure you want to cancel the installation?”
Figure 5-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box
2. When you click Yes, the Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted.
Figure 5-2 Cancel dialog box
3. Click the Finish button to close the installation screens.
ENWW Installation instructions 163
Installation in Windows
The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context in the following sections.
Modifying a pre-existing installation
If an HP Color LaserJet 3600 has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of the main
install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install printer setting changes to Modify
Installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are
presented, depending on the selections you make.
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence
NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Professional
installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating
systems.
The Full Installation includes the following components:
HP Traditional host-based driver (for Windows 98 and Windows Me systems only)
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver (for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
systems only)
HP Easy Printer Care
Screen Fonts
Install Notes
User Guide
When you select the Install Printer option from the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software
CD, the Language Selection dialog box appears.
Figure 5-3 Language Selection dialog box
NOTE The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD.
The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this
selection as the default.
164 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the drop-
down menu.
Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome dialog box appears.
Figure 5-4 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Setup Wizard dialog box
NOTE The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3600
printer. If you try to install the printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, the following screen
appears.
Figure 5-5 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System
ENWW Installation instructions 165
Installation in Windows
Click OK to continue the installation. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears, as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 5-6 Software License Agreement dialog box
The I disagree option is selected by default. Click I agree and then click Next to proceed with the
installation.
The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 3600 does not support infrared connections.
166 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
If you select USB Cable (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), and then click Next, the
Installation Type dialog box opens. This is the default option.
If you select Parallel Cable (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable), and then click Next, the
Installation Type dialog box opens.
To continue with the default installation sequence, see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box
NOTE The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3600
printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During
the installation process, you will be prompted by the software to connect the device during
installation.
If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer over the network, select Wired Networking in
the Printer Connection dialog box.
For a network installation, the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer must be connected to the network and
turned on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the printer.
NOTE For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g Wireless
Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the documentation that
came with the print server.
Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 167
Installation in Windows
NOTE If you are installing the product over a network, you must let the search complete for the
first subnet in the network in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned
for available HP Color LaserJet 3600 printers, the results are displayed in the Printers Found
dialog box. However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the
first results are displayed. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within
about 20 seconds. It may take some time before the other subnets are searched and the full list
of printers is displayed in the Printers Found dialog box, depending on the configuration of the
network.
If your network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box appears,
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-9 Firewall Detected dialog box
If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box
appears, as shown in the following figure.
168 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-10 Printer Not Found dialog box
The product might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the printer is connected and is turned
on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall,
click Next.
The Searching dialog box appears (see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box).
If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have
been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 169
Installation in Windows
Select the printer you want to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens
(see Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box).
If the printer you want to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The Confirm
Network Settings dialog box opens. See Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box and follow
the instructions for changing the TCP/IP address.
If a single printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that
have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-12 Printer Found dialog box
If you click No, I want to install a different printer and then click Next, the Check Printer
Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving
you the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address (see Figure
5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box).
If you select Yes, install this printer and then click Next, the Confirm Network Settings dialog box
opens, as shown in the following figure.
170 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box
On the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Installation
Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box).
If you click the Change Settings button, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in
the following figure.
WARNING! When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change Settings button,
you change the actual settings in the product Jetdirect card. You should make changes to these
settings only with the advice of your network administrator.
ENWW Installation instructions 171
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box
If you click No, the Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box).
If you click Yes, the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP
Settings dialog box).
The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears if you selected No, I want to install a
different printer on the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the product over the
network, is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box
172 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
If you select Search again for all available printers and then click Next, the Searching dialog box
opens (see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box).
If you click Specify Printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box opens. The
Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure.
If you select Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next, the Printer
Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box).
Figure 5-16 Specify Printer dialog box
You can specify a printer by selecting one of the following options and typing in the required information:
Hardware Address (MAC)
IP Address
IP Hostname
When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer
Found dialog box opens (see Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box).
If you selected Enter settings for a printer not on the network on the Check Printer Connection
dialog box and then clicked Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following
figure.
ENWW Installation instructions 173
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box
To install the printer using the hardware address, select Hardware Address, type the product hardware
address in the field, and click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens.
To install the printer using the TCP/IP address, select IP Address, type the product TCP/IP address in
the field, and click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box
174 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Type a port name in the Port Name field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box (see
Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box).
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20
Installation Type dialog box).
NOTE If you selected Yes on the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 5-14
Confirm Changing Setting dialog box), the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens, as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box
If you make a change in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking Next)
and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with information that was found by the installer
and reported in the Printer Found screen.
Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the
Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box).
If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens
(see Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box).
ENWW Installation instructions 175
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box
NOTE The components of a Full Installation might vary from product to product.
Select Basic Installation to install only the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver (for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003) or the HP Traditional host-based driver (for Windows 98 and
Windows Me). If you select Basic Installation and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box
opens (see Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box).
If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-21 Drivers dialog box
176 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
A blank check box indicates that the feature is not installed. A check mark appears when you select an
install state for that feature.
Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive is shown on the dialog
box.
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.
It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the
drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you do are not installing a driver).
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Additional Software dialog box opens.
To view details about the drivers, click Details. The driver Details dialog box appears.
Figure 5-22 Driver Details dialog box
All the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click
OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.
On the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box
appears.
ENWW Installation instructions 177
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-23 Additional Software dialog box
To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box
appears.
Figure 5-24 Additional software Details dialog box
All the software that is available on the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog
box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.
178 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Click Next to open the Ready to Install dialog box.
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box
Click Install to start the installation process.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:
General
Sharing
Figure 5-26 Printer Properties General tab
ENWW Installation instructions 179
Installation in Windows
On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field.
Use the Location and Comment fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.
If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer
as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over
a network.
Figure 5-27 Printer Properties Sharing tab
On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, select the Shared as option
and type the printer name in the text field.
NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share
the printer on Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by
selecting Share as, you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support
for other operating systems.
If you select Share as on the Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box, the text box becomes
available. Type the share name and then click Next. The Ready to Install dialog box opens.
NOTE The share name should not exceed seven characters.
If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional
Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.
If you are installing the printer in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or a Windows Server 2003 operating
environment and you want to install additional drivers for Windows 98 or Windows Me, select Additional
Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.
180 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-28 Additional Drivers dialog box
NOTE If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer you are
using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.
The Additional Drivers dialog box does not appear if your computer is running Windows 98 or
Windows Me.
On the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-
system software folders and files. The Installing HP Color LaserJet 3600 dialog box is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-29 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.
At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.
When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW Installation instructions 181
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-30 Finish dialog box
Click the Finish button to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be
presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
The Next Steps dialog box appears.
Figure 5-31 Next Steps dialog box
NOTE If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3600 over a direct connection and HP Easy
Printer Care was not installed earlier, an option for installing HP Easy Printer Care appears on
the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Next Steps dialog box.
To verify that the printer is connected, click Print Driver Test Page. The Test Page dialog box appears.
182 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
If the test page prints properly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, click Troubleshoot to open
screens that guide you through options to find the source of the problem.
If you have access to the Internet, you can register your product online. On the Congratulations dialog
box, click Register Product to open the HP Registration Web site.
ENWW Installation instructions 183
Installation in Windows
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:
1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. The
Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen
appears.
In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click
Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3. Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a
part of this process.
184 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-
bit print driver. 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to
install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature.
1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes, and then click Add a
printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3. Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as a
part of this process.
4. Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the following files on the software CD:
To install the HP Traditional host-based driver, select \<language>\Drivers\Win98_ME\(your
language)\hpp3600x.inf
To install the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver, select \<language>\Drivers
\Win32_2000_XP_S2003\hpc3600e.inf
5. Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start the
utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this
option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the
following selections:
Language
Operating system
Print drivers
Components
Running the Installer Customization Wizard
The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be started from the CD browser, depending
on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from MSI with its own interface.
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file
(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple
systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be edited for system
configuration differences directly in the RESPONSE.INI file. The Installer HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard, available on the printing-system software CD in the Manuals\<language> folder,
provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file.
To run the Installer Customization Wizard
1. Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3600 software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. In the CD browser main screen, click Installer Customization Wizard.
ENWW Installation instructions 185
Installation in Windows
The Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Installation Customization Wizard screen appears.
To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following
section.
Figure 5-32 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Installation Customization Wizard screen
Dialogs
Click Next on the Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Installation Customization Wizard dialog
box. The Language Selection dialog box appears.
Figure 5-33 Language Selection dialog box
Select the language and click Next. The Software Licence Agreement dialog box appears.
186 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-34 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box
Click Cancel on this or any other screen where it appears to cancel the installation (see Using the Help,
Back, Next, and Cancel buttons.)
Read the software-license agreement, click I agree and then click Next to open the Language dialog
box.
Figure 5-35 Language dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 187
Installation in Windows
NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language that
is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has
been completed using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the
language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard
installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be installed
to restore the option to install other languages.
The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text
in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier). The Language dialog
box defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box, but any language
that is available on the CD can be chosen for the customized installer. The language selection is
recorded in the response file.
Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen.
Figure 5-36 Printer Port dialog box
Select Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you select Network
Path and click the Browse button, the Browse for Printer dialog box opens.
188 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-37 Browse for Printer dialog box
Navigate to a printer and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field on the Printer Port dialog
box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box.
Select Local (direct connect) port and then click Next to open the Printer Connection dialog box.
The Printer Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support.
Figure 5-38 Printer Connection dialog box
Select the type of connection you are using and click Nextto open the Drivers dialog box. See Figure
5-41 Driversdialog box.
ENWW Installation instructions 189
Installation in Windows
On the Printer Port dialog box, click New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify TCP/
IP Port dialog box. The Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are
available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must
be created identically on the system where it will be used.
Figure 5-39 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box
Click IP Address: to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the printer. Only numerals
are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP Address:
field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP address.
Click IP Hostname: to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any characters
are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option
is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message
from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP hostname.
Click Hardware Address: to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It
accepts any characters but limits the entry to 12 characters. If this option is selected, you must type at
least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing,
prompting you for a valid hardware address.
After you select any the options, type the appropriate name or address, and then click Next, the
Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
For each of the foregoing options on the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, you can either use the default
port name (as specified in each of the three options) or specify a different name.
If you select Use Default and click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens. See Figure 5-41 Driversdialog
box.
To specify a different name, select Specify and click Next to open the Port Creation Options dialog
box.
190 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-40 Port Creation Options dialog box
Click No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to create a port.
Click Yes, create the port and click Next to open the Drivers dialog box.
If the printer cannot be found, type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and
click Next.
Figure 5-41 Driversdialog box
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.
It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the
drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you do are not installing a driver).
ENWW Installation instructions 191
Installation in Windows
To view details about the drivers, click Details. The driver Details dialog box appears.
Figure 5-42 Driver Details dialog box
All the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click
OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.
On the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Driver Configuration dialog box
appears.
192 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-43 Driver Configuration dialog box
All the drivers that are preconfigurable from theDrivers dialog box are listed on the Driver
Configuration dialog box. Click No, I don't want to configure the drivers and then click Next to go
to the Additional Software dialog box.
Click No, I don't want to configure the drivers and then click Next to go to preconfigure the drivers.
The Driver Configuration – Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
Figure 5-44 Driver Configuration – Printing Preferences dialog box
Use this dialog box to configure the Printing Preferences and the Device Settings features, and then
click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears.
ENWW Installation instructions 193
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-45 Additional Software dialog box
To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box
appears.
Figure 5-46 Additional software Details dialog box
All the software that you selected on the Additional Software dialog box are described in the Details
dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.
194 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
On the Additional Software dialog box, click Next to open the Custom Installer Location dialog box,
which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is large,
but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate.
To change the physical location of the printer, click Browse…, navigate to the folder that you want, and
click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.
Click Next to open the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 195
Installation in Windows
NOTE During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the
directory that appears in the Location field. Be sure that enough space is available on the
directory before continuing.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:
General
Sharing
On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field.
Use the Location and Comment fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.
If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer
as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over
a network.
196 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, select the Shared as option
and type the printer name in the text field.
If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional
Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.
If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer you are using to install
the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.
On the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-
system software folders and files. The Installing dialog box is shown in the following figure.
ENWW Installation instructions 197
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-49 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.
At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.
When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-50 Finish dialog box
Click the Finish button to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.
198 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be
presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
Distribution
The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except
that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected. The
installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful
when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the
installation without being prompted.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
Customized silent installer
Command-line silent installer
The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name
cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package.
The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs the printing-system
components that are included in the Full Installation.
The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the
RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj3600
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function
when you cannot see the product on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is
to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from
a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these
procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a
function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor types.
To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system,
you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the
Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000
Printer .INF file must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF
file.
Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or
Windows Me PS Driver V4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers running the
same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a
Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
ENWW Installation instructions 199
Installation in Windows
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on
different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver
that is different from the one on the print server.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000
and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. User-
mode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes
and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”)
only the process in which it is running, — not the whole operating system. Because access to critical
system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
1. In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000 operating systems, click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control
Panel, click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware
devices (Windows XP Home).
2. Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.
3. Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
200 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Installation in Windows
6 Installation for Macintosh operating
systems
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For
detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer, see Supported operating systems.
This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-
system software for Macintosh operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:
Macintosh component descriptions
Installing the Macintosh printing system
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
In-box disk layout
Mac OS X installation
ENWW Introduction 201
Installation in Macintosh
Macintosh component descriptions
The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
PPDs for Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later
PDEs for Mac OS X only (V10.1.5 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the HP Color LaserJet 3600
are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the
appropriate localized folder.
PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer to
communicate with the product. A print setup tool for the PPDs is provided on the printing-system
software CD. For information about the print setup tools in various Macintosh operating systems, see
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems.
PDEs
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later only) that provide
access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP Embedded Web Server
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to
perform the following tasks:
Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.
Set a password for the product.
From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see
the printing software help).
Install notes
This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-
system software, and technical assistance.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with
Mac OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or
in the Macintosh OS Help Center.
Screen fonts
The printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems no longer includes a font installer. The
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer uses previously installed system fonts when installed on a Macintosh
computer.
202 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are the same for a network administrator, a
network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the
printer.
NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk
connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct
connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 3600,
connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed. Macintosh
operating systems do not support parallel connections.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language
for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language.
NOTE Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS X installation.
Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the
Macintosh OS
1. Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp color LaserJet
3600 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
2. Double-click the Mac OS X icon.
NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog box (Mac OS X, V10.1.5 and later only).
3. The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to
complete the software installation.
NOTE If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system,
please be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1
minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
4. When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select Set up a printer with Mac OS X to finish
setting up your product:
The software program that you use to finish setting up the printer varies by operating system. The
following table shows the print setup tools that are available.
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems
Operating System HP LaserJet Utility LaserWriter 8 Print Center Printer Setup Utility
Mac OS X V10.1.5 x
Mac OS X V10.2.8 x
Mac OS X V10.3.9 x
Mac OS X V10.4.1 x x
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 203
Installation in Macintosh
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4
1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility. The
Printer List screen appears.
Figure 6-1 Printer List screen
2. Click Add. The Printer Browser screen shows the following tabs:
Default Browser
IP Printer
Figure 6-2 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab
3. In the Name field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
4. In the Location field, type the product location.
204 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
5. In the Print Using field, select one of the following options:
Auto Select (default)
Generic PostScript Printer
Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)
6. Click Add to save the settings. The product name appears in the Printer List.
7. If you want to search for additional printers, click More Printers. The Printer Browser search dialog
box opens.
Figure 6-3 More Printers screen
8. Use the drop-down menus to change search settings. Select the printer that you want to install and
then click Add.
To cancel the search, click Cancel.
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 205
Installation in Macintosh
9. To connect the printer through its TCP/IP address, click the IP Printer tab.
Figure 6-4 IP Printer tab
10. In the Search field in the upper right corner, select one of the following options:
All (default)
AppleTalk
Bonjour
FireWire
Open Directory
Shared
USB
11. In the Protocol drop-down menu, select one of the following options:
Internet Printing Protoco — IPP
Line Printer Daemon — LPD
HP Jet Direct – Socket
12. If you know the queue path of the printer, you can type it in the Queue field.
13. In the Name field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
14. In the Location field, type the product location.
206 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
15. In the Print Using field, select one of the following options:
Auto Select (default)
Generic PostScript Printer
Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)
16. Click Add to save the settings. The product name appears in the Printer List.
Figure 6-5 Printer List screen
17. Double-click the product name to open the Print Job Status screen and verify that the product
has been installed.
Figure 6-6 Print Job Status screen
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 207
Installation in Macintosh
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3
1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.
2. Click Add Printer (in Mac OS X V10.1), or click Add (Mac OS X V10.2), or click Printers and then
click Add Printer (Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later).
3. When the New Printer drivers detected popup box appears, click OK.
4. From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for your product.
5. Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your product. For
example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select your product zone; or if you are using
IP Printing, type an IP address in the Printer Address field. In the Printer Model drop-down menu,
select HP. In the Model Name drop-down menu, select HP Color LaserJet 3600.
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click
the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want to
add.
6. Click Add. The HP Color LaserJet 3600 appears in the Printer List.
7. To configure installable options in Mac OS X V10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional
paper trays, click Show Info? and select Installable Options in the drop-down menu.
NOTE This step is necessary only for network connections and USB connections using
Rendezvous/Bonjour. AppleTalk automatically configures the installable options.
8. Configure the options, click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog box.
208 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash.
ENWW Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system 209
Installation in Macintosh
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh Printing System consists of three files: the HP LaserJet Installer—Integrated installer
program for Mac OS X and a PDF folder for manuals. The folders are named as follows:
Mac OS X
PDF
210 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
X operating system.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy
Install (the typical Installation option).
If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click
the hp LaserJet 3600 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.
Figure 6-7 CD-ROM HP Color LaserJet 3600 installer icon
The hp LaserJet Software dialog box opens.
Figure 6-8 hp LaserJet Software dialog box
In the hp LaserJet 3600 folder, double-click the Mac OS X folder to open it.
In the Mac OS X folder, double-click the HP Color LaserJet v.5.6.0.068 icon. This begins the install
process.
Figure 6-9 HP Color LaserJet v.5.6.0.068 icon
If you are installing your product on Mac OS X V10.1 or later, the Authenticate dialog box appears.
ENWW Mac OS X installation 211
Installation in Macintosh
Figure 6-10 Authenticate dialog box
Type the correct “admin” password and click OK to continue. The installer startup screen appears.
Click Cancel to exit the installation.
Figure 6-11 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup screen dialog box
Click Continue. The License dialog box appears.
212 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
Figure 6-12 License dialog box
Click Print... to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license
agreement.
Click Save As... to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.
Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.
Click Accept to continue the installation. TheHP LaserJet Installer dialog box appears.
Figure 6-13 HP Color LaserJet Installer dialog box (Easy Install)
The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also select
Custom Install in the same menu.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
ENWW Mac OS X installation 213
Installation in Macintosh
Figure 6-14 HP Color LaserJet Installer dialog box (Custom Install)
Click Select All to install all of the options that are available on the printing-system software CD, or the
components that you want to install by using the check boxes in the list.
Click the I icon on the right of each item in the list to open a popup screen that describes the component.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The files are installed in the Library folder on
the Macintosh CD.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Figure 6-15 Installing dialog box
The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the
installation.
Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
When installation is complete, the LaserJet Readme.RTF file opens and the LaserJet ReadMe icon
appears on the desktop. Follow the instructions in the readme file to set up a printer queue for your
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
Figure 6-16 LaserJet Readme icon
A popup message also appears, stating that the installation was successful.
214 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
Figure 6-17 Installation success message
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
Click Quit to exit the installer.
Click Restart to exit the installer and restart your computer.
ENWW Mac OS X installation 215
Installation in Macintosh
216 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installation in Macintosh
7 Engineering Details
Introduction
This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics:
File to E-mail utility
Media attributes
Remote firmware update
Printing print-ready documents
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
ENWW Introduction 217
Engineering Details
File to E-mail utility
The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) program that reads an .INI
file to detect where the HP LaserJet product software is installed. The program then attaches relevant
log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting. The
utility runs on the computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet product.
The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to the computer during the software installation.
HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e-mail or by posting it to an HP web page.
The tool is compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail programs. It does not run with Web-based
e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL.
Depending on the speed of the computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log
files and attach them to an e-mail message.
The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP Color LaserJet 3600 software
CD:
<CD-ROM drive>Temp\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.exe
<CD-ROM drive>Temp\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini
To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to the desktop, navigate to them in Explorer, and then
double-click FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message,
and attaches the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE The figure is provided as an example only. The actual files attached will vary, depending
on your product.
218 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached
If the File to E-mail utility fails for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message), all the files
are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached to the
end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately.
ENWW File to E-mail utility 219
Engineering Details
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
media sources and destinations
media-tray configurations
media-source commands
media types and sizes
PCL 6 custom media sizes
Media sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer:
Table 7-1 HP Color LaserJet 3600 media sources and destinations
Media sources 100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1) standard
250-sheet paper tray (tray 2) standard
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3) optional
Media destinations standard top bin standard
Media-source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the
command for tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l1H is the command fortray 2.
Table 7-2 Media-source commands
Media source PCL 6
ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource
1
Manual feed in tray 1 2
Tray 1 (100-sheet) 3
Tray 2 (250-sheet) 4
Tray 3 (500-sheet) 5
Automatically Select (HP Traditional host-based driver) or Printer
Auto Select (HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver)
1
1
For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for tray 2.
220 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and media-
handling constraints for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer.
Driver features and attributes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down
menu on the Paper/Quality tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system.
The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes
Paper sizes
1
Width Height PCL 6
2
Letter 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
279 mm
(11.0 inches)
"LETTER"
Statement 215.9 mm
(8.5 inches)
139.7 mm
(5.5 inches)
"STATEMENT"
16K 197 mm
(7.75 inches)
273 mm
(10.75 inches)
"16K"
8.5 x 13 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
330 mm
(13 inches)
"8.5x13"
A4 210 mm
(8.27 inches)
297 mm
(11.69 inches)
"A4"
A5 148 mm
(5.83 inches)
210 mm
(8.27 inches)
"A5"
B5 (JIS) 182 mm
(7.17 inches)
257 mm
(10.12 inches)
"B5(JIS)"
Double Postscard (JIS)
(HP Traditional host-based
driver)
100 mm
(3.94 inches)
200 mm
(7.87 inches)
"JPOSTD"
Double Japan Postscard
Rotated
(HP JetReady 4.2 host-
based driver)
148 mm
(5.83 inches)
200 mm
(7.87 inches)
“DPOST(J)”
Envelope #10 105 mm
(4.13 inches)
241 mm
(9.5 inches)
"ENV #10"
Envelope B5 176 mm
(6.93 inches)
250 mm
(9.84 inches)
"ENV B5"
Envelope C5 162 mm
(6.38 inches)
229 mm
(9.02 inches)
"ENV C5"
Envelope DL 110 mm 220 mm "ENV DL"
ENWW Media attributes 221
Engineering Details
Paper sizes
1
Width Height PCL 6
2
(4.33 inches) (8.66 inches)
Envelope Monarch 99 mm
(3.88 inches)
190 mm
(7.5 inches)
"MONARCH"
Executive 185 mm
(7.25 inches)
266 mm
(10.5 inches)
"EXEC"
Executive (JIS) 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
330 mm
(12.99 inches)
"EXEC(J)"
Legal 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
355 mm
(14.0 inches)
"LEGAL"
Custom Minimum:
127 mm
(5.0 inches)
Maximum:
215.9 mm
(8.5 inches)
Minimum:
76.2 mm
(3.0 inches)
Maximum:
355.6 mm
(14.0 inches)
CUSTOM
1
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.
2
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
Table 7-4 Supported input media types
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1/top
bin/stacker
bin
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500-
sheet)
Duplexing unit Manual duplexing
Unspecified Y Y Y Y Y
Plain Y Y Y Y Y
Preprinted Y Y Y Y Y
Letterhead Y Y Y Y Y
Transparency Y Y Y N N
Prepunched Y Y Y Y Y
Labels Y Y Y N N
Bond Y Y Y Y Y
Recycled Y Y Y Y Y
Color Y Y Y Y Y
Light (60–75 g/m
2
, or
16.4 - 20.5 lb.)
YY Y Y Y
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued)
222 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1/top
bin/stacker
bin
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500-
sheet)
Duplexing unit Manual duplexing
Intermediate (90 -
104 g/m
2
, or 24.7 -
28.5 lb.)
YYYYY
Heavy (105 - 120 g/m
2
,
or 28.8 - 32.9 lb.)
YYYYY
Extra Heavy (120 - 163
g/m
2
, or 32.9 - 44.7 lb.)
Y Y N N Y
Cardstock (164 - 220 g/
m
2
, or 45 - 60.3 lb.)
Y Y N N Y
Heavy Glossy (120 -
160 g/m
2
)
Y Y N N Y
Extra Heavy Glossy
(120 - 220g/m
2
)
Y Y N N Y
Rough (90 - 105 g/m
2
,
or 24.7 - 28.8 lb.)
YYYYY
Glossy (75 - 120 g/m
2
,
or 20.5 - 32.9 lb.)
YYYYY
Tough Paper (Glossy
Film)
Y Y Y N Y
Envelope Y Y N N N
1
Staples a maximum of 30 pages weighing from 60 g/m
2
to 220 g/m
2
(16 lb to 58 lb) except where listed as N (no) or Y (other
number).
Custom paper sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 3600:
Table 7-5 Custom media sizes
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Table 7-4 Supported input media types (continued)
ENWW Media attributes 223
Engineering Details
Media-type commands
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of
characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters
plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-6 Media-type commands
Esc& n# Wd Paper type
Esc& 6Wd Plain
Esc& 11 Wd Preprinted
Esc& 11 Wd Letterhead
Esc& 13 Wd Transparency
1
Esc& 11 Wd Prepunched
Esc& 7Wd Labels
Esc& 5Wd Bond
Esc& 9Wd Recycled
Esc& 6Wd Color
Esc& 6Wd Light
Esc& 13 Wd Intermediate
Esc& 6Wd Heavy
Esc& 12 Wd Extra Heavy
Esc& 11 Wd Cardstock
2
Esc& 6Wd Rough
Esc& 7Wd Glossy
Esc& 13 Wd Heavy Glossy
Esc& 19 Wd Extra Heavy Glossy
Esc& 12 Wd Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
Esc& 9Wd Envelope
1
You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
2
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".
224 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Remote firmware update
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for
downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest
printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
1. Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the printer.
2. Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to your computer.
3. Download the new firmware to the product.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page,
follow these instructions.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press and to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press .
3. Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press to print the configuration page.
5. Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The
firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a self-
extracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following
URL:
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_firmware
The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file.
NOTE For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file.
Downloading the new firmware to the product
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/
clj3600.
The product can receive an RFU update to a product when the product is in a READY state. The product
waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to
default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the
defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets,
and Web-access alerts.
ENWW Remote firmware update 225
Engineering Details
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the
product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the
host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization
time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the number of EIO devices
installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is
processed.
Use one of the methods described in this manual to update your product firmware.
Printer messages during the firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause Result
The job was cancelled from the control panel. No update has occurred.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example,
the parallel cable was removed).
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE
process.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel
port.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process. The update has been completed.
Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote
firmware update fails in a Windows OS, the .RFU file must be resent. For more information, see Table
7-9 Update messages.
If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh OS, contact support from an HP Customer Care Center.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective
action required for each situation.
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action
The .RFU file is corrupted. The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download
the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file from
www.hp.com/go/clj3600_firmware.
The wrong product is contained in
the .RFU file.
The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the
correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/
clj3600_firmware.
226 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action
The upgrade was interrupted. See Table 7-9 Update messages.
A flash hardware failure occurred. Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call
technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the product
for a local telephone support list).
Three messages appear during a normal update process; a fourth (RESEND UPGRADE) appears only
if the update process does not succeed.
Table 7-9 Update messages
Printer message Explanation
RECEIVING UPGRADE This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of
an .RFU update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of
the .RFU update.
NOTE If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the
firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the
control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message
appears on the product control panel to indicate that the update was
interrupted.
PERFORMING UPGRADE This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.
NOTE If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while
PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the
update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on
the control-panel display.
INITIALIZING This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the
DIMM until the product reinitializes.
RESEND UPGRADE This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as
the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update
by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection
(network, parallel, or USB).
RFU LOAD ERROR
SEND RFU UPGRADE
ON PARALLEL PORT
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
print-engine firmware is corrupted.
If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is
attached to the parallel port of the product.
NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the
control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through
a browser.
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure (continued)
ENWW Remote firmware update 227
Engineering Details
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current
level of firmware
2. Open a browser window.
3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/
IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP://
192.168.0.90
4. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.
5. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window.
NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable
folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the
following procedure to enable the folder view.
a. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select theAdvanced tab.
b. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
c. Click OK to save the setting.
6. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
7. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network
connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 3600 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to
update the firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Windows operating systems
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
NOTE Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Powersave
mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2. Open a command window on your computer.
228 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
3. Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type ftp 192.168.0.90.
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7. Type bin at the command prompt.
8. Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the
command window.
9. Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded
from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\3600FW.RFU, and then press
Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3600fw.rfu" .
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
11. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
ENWW Remote firmware update 229
Engineering Details
Macintosh operating systems
1. Make a note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current
level of firmware.
2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer
hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3. Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type FTP 192.168.0.90
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6. Type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the
Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/3600fw.rfu, and then
press Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3600FW.RFU".
To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type put and
a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path
to the file is automatically placed after the put command .
7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
8. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the
product by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the command
prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
230 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
product port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3600fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, typeC:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3600fw.rfu"
lpt1
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
6. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
7. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or
in an MS-DOS window.
ENWW Remote firmware update 231
Engineering Details
Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer drivers, but it is possible to update
the printer firmware in Windows NT 4.0.
1. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer
port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3600fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3600fw.rfu"
lpt1
2. Press Enter on the keyboard.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through a USB port
If the product is connected over a USB connection, follow these instructions:
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME>\
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including
the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being
shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
copy /b 3000fw.rfu\\your_computer\clj3000
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3600fw.rfu"
\\your_computer\clj3000
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the
computer screen.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
232 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions:
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including
the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being
shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3600fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3600fw.rfu"
\\your_server\your_computer
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the
computer screen.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
ENWW Remote firmware update 233
Engineering Details
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
1. At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>, where
</home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file.
2. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
3. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility
Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP Printer Utility and the 3600FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product. The HP Printer
Utility is a software program that is available only for Mac OS X V10.2 or later.
The HP Printer Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 3600 printing-system software CD-ROM
that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP Printer Utility by
downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software.
The firmware file (3600FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/
clj3600_firmware
See Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP Printer Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.
Complete the following steps:
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. Select Update Firmware, click Choose and browse to firmware upgrade file, and click Open.
3. On the Update Firmware screen, click Update.
NOTE You may receive an error message on the screen indicating that the printer is offline.
Verify that the printer is turned on. If it is, ignore the message. The Updating screen appears
and the update proceeds as expected.
4. The update process can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with
the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel.
234 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
5. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1. From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l
<FILENAME> -OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where <IPADDRESS> can
be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the
filename of the .RFU file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
5. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on your computer. Complete
the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU
file from the HP Web site.
1. Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2. Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and then
click Go. The product Status window opens.
3. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
ENWW Remote firmware update 235
Engineering Details
4. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to update
in the list of products, and click to select it.
5. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update
Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
6. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in
the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8. Refresh the browser.
9. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product.
11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
12. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1. Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2. Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps:
a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.
-or-
b. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.
-or-
c. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3. To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4. The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if
necessary to view it.
5. In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information.
Click Return to Device Group when finished.
236 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Printing print-ready documents
Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program
that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original
application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet
downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP Color LaserJet 3600
printer without first opening the original software program:
HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)
Portable Document Format (.PDF)
Postscript (.PS)
Text (.TXT)
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.
NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However,
any print-ready file type can be substituted.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. Open a browser window.
3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address
of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP:// 192.168.0.90
4. Locate the print-ready file for the product.
5. Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder
viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following
procedure to enable the folder view.
1. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.
2. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
3. Click OK to save the setting.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 3600 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print
a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:
ENWW Printing print-ready documents 237
Engineering Details
Windows operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a Configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. Open a command window on your computer.
3. Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type the following:
ftp 192.168.0.90
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7. Type bin at the command prompt.
8. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
9. Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed,
including the path. For example, type the following:
put C:\LJ\3600FW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3600FW.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10. Press Enter on the keyboard.
11. The print-ready file prints.
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
238 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Macintosh operating systems
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer
hard drive in the following folder:
System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal
3. Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type the following:
FTP 192.168.0.90
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6. You can drag and drop the firmware file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/
Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the print-
ready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following:
put /username/desktop/3600FW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3600FW.PDF"
To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type
put and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The
complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command .
7. Press Enter.
8. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.
9. The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port
To print directly by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section for your operating
system.
ENWW Printing print-ready documents 239
Engineering Details
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type the following:
copy /b c:\3600FW.PDF lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3600FW.PDF"
4. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints.
5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt
or in an MS-DOS window.
1. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3600FW.PDF lpt1
2. Press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\3600FW.PDF". The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the
job prints.
3. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
240 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is
being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3600FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3600FW.PDF"
\\your_server\sharename
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>,
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. From a command window, type the following:
lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps
<FILENAME>
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where
FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
3. The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.
4. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
ENWW Printing print-ready documents 241
Engineering Details
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for each
supported operating system that the HP Color LaserJet 3600 supports. The printing-system driver for
Windows 98 and Windows Me is theHP Traditional host-based driver. The printing-system driver for
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 is the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver.
For more information about the HP Traditional host-based driver, see HP Traditional host-based driver
for Windows. For more information about the HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver, see
HP JetReady 4.2 host-based driver for Windows.
NOTE HP Color LaserJet 3600 print driver features are supported in both the 32-bit and the
64-bit versions of the Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
HP Color LaserJet 3600 print driver features are supported in Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, except
as otherwise noted.
Raster compression
Table 7-10 Color raster compression support
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Windows Me
Mac OS X
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
Color raster compression x x
PJL/PJL Encoding
Table 7-11 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
PJL support x x x
UTF-8 encoding for PJL (Unicode to 8-bit) x
242 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Job tracking
Table 7-12 Driver support for job tracking
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
PRN file driver identification x x
Job accounting information x x
Job accounting enhancements (UUID) x
Reliable Time Services – born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x
Job Timestamp – born on date (PJL TIMESTAMP) x x
Sending user name with every job x x
Connectivity/Printing
Table 7-13 Driver support for connectivity features
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
Parallel (direct connect)
Network — TCP/IP (Wired) x x x
Network — TCP/IP (Wireless) x x x
USB (Direct Connect) through 7.1.2 Port Monitor (MS USB
Print) (bidirectional)
x x
USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 Port Monitor (HP DOT4 /
7.1.3 ) (bidirectional)
x x
USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 Port Monitor (MS
DOT4 / 7.1.3) (bidirectional) —Windows XP only
x
USB (Direct Connect) through 7.1.2 (Apple USB Print)
(bidirectional)
x
USB (Direct Connect) via hp socket based backend (bi-
directional)
x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 243
Engineering Details
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 )
(bidirectional) Mac OS X only
x
Wireless 802.11b x
Bluetooth x
Rendezvous x
Bidirectional communication
Table 7-14 Driver support for bidirectional communication features
Operating System Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
Auto Config via EAC – TCP/IP x
Installer Install – Auto Config via EAC – parallel (LPT) ( DOT4
stack)
Installer Install – Auto Config via EAC – USB (DOT4) x
Automatic Configuration (other than EAC) x
USB (through 1284.4 port monitor) x x
USB (direct connect) through 1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 /
7.1.3) (bidirectional) — Win XP Only
x
USB (direct connect) through 7.1.2 (Apple USB Print)
(bidirectional)
x
Update Now x
Language Monitor (MasterMon) (LJ) – stat only
1
x
1
MasterMon, a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional
communication products and to insert PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.
Table 7-13 Driver support for connectivity features (continued)
244 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 7-15 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Feature lockout
Continuous export x
Bundle support
Table 7-16 Bundle support
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
Printer Bundle in UI
Tray and paper assignment
Table 7-17 Tray and paper assignment
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98
and
Windows Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
Assign paper size to tray x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 245
Engineering Details
Installable options
Table 7-18 Driver support for installable options
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional h
ost-based driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
Duplexing unit x x x
Manual duplex enable x x x
Total memory x
DWS (available memory) x
Additional source trays x x x
Printer services
Table 7-19 Printer services (Services tab)
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional h
ost-based driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Host-based
Internet Services Links/Launch product support Web site x x x
1
Supported in HP Traditional host-based driver only for BPD products. BPD has their own Service's Tab which replaces the standard Ocenia
Services Tab and has this feature.
246 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
UI features
Table 7-20 Driver support for UI features
Operating system Windows XP,Wi
ndows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
UI tabs ("Panels" in Macintosh) x x x
UI extensions x x
Page preview images x x x
Paper size dimensions x x
About . . . x x x
Accessibility/Disability (JAWS) x x x (Mac OS X only)
Accessibility architecture x x
Help features
Table 7-21 Driver support for Help features
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
What's this? Help (F1) x x
Help button x x
Bubble Help x
MS Windows "?" Help x x
Constraint Help x x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 247
Engineering Details
Quick Sets
Table 7-22 Driver support for Quick Sets
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Print Task Quick Sets x x
User Defined Quick Sets x x x
Paper Sizes
Table 7-23 Driver support for paper sizes
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Paper Size selection x x x
User-defined custom paper x x x
Custom paper dialog through driver UI x x x
Media Types
Table 7-24 Driver support for media types
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Media types appear in one list x x x
Media types displayed in Treeview x
248 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
User Defined Media Types x x
Combined Media Types & Sources in program. (Always ON,
NO driver UI switch)
x x
Combined Media Types and sources in program (in driver UI) x
Print quality and resolution
Table 7-25 Print-quality and resolution features
Operating system Windows XP,Wi
ndows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Print-quality options x x x
Reordering Options
Table 7-26 Driver support for reordering options
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Page order (based on output bin) x
Page order (reordering for job) x x
Table 7-24 Driver support for media types (continued)
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 249
Engineering Details
Resizing options
Table 7-27 Resizing options
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Print Document On x x
Scale to Fit x x
Allow Scaling from Large Paper x x
% of Normal Size x x x
Rotate by 180 degrees x x
Color settings
Table 7-28 Color settings
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows
Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Mac
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Mac
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Color Options x x x
Manual/automatic color options x x
CMYK inks
Print in Grayscale x x x
ICM Method x
ICM Intent x
250 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Watermarks
Table 7-29 Driver support for watermarks feature
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Watermarks on/off x x
First page only x x
Custom watermark definition x x
Watermark angle x x
Watermark font name x x
Watermark font color x x
Watermark font shading x x
Watermark font size x x
Watermark font style x x
Locally defined watermarks x x
Alternative source/paper type
Table 7-30 Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
All pages the same x x x
Use different paper (UI control) x x x
Front Cover (Blank Front Cover Inserted) x
First Page x x
Other pages x x
Last Page x
Back Cover — Blank Back Cover Inserted x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 251
Engineering Details
Finishing options and duplexing
Table 7-31 Duplexing
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Auto duplex/print on both sides x x x
Manual duplex x x x
Mixed duplex and simplex in single job x x
Smart duplexing – single page jobs x x
Long Edge/Short Edge (Flip On) x x x
Pages per sheet (N-up) x x x
Page borders on/off x x x
Page order (N-Up) x x x
Booklet Printing (layout through software) x x
Booklet Target Size x x
Other document options
Table 7-32 Other document options
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Orientation (portrait/landscape) x x x
Number of copies x x x
Ignore application collation x x x
Collate x x x
Collate – feature in driver UI x
Advanced printing features x
252 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Font support
Table 7-33 Font support
Operating system Windows XP,
Windows 2000,
Windows Serve
r 2003
Windows 98,
Me
Macintosh
Driver type HP JetReady 4.
2 host-based
driver
HP Traditional
host-based
driver
Macintosh
Driver Host-based Host-based Postscript
Print Text as Black x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 253
Engineering Details
254 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Engineering Details
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
HP JetReady host-based driver
133
HP Traditional host-based driver
92
A
About tab
HP JetReady host-based driver
154
HP Traditional host-based driver
105
accessibility
documentation 16
drivers 247
accessories, automatic
configuration 26
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Act) compliance 16
Add Printer installation 184
Add Printer wizard 26
Additional Drivers dialog box,
Windows 181
Additional Software dialog box,
Customization Wizard 178, 193,
194
Adobe Acrobat Reader
installing 22
printing PDF files without 237
viewing documentation 15
Advanced Printing Features setting,
HP JetReady host-based driver
114
Advanced tab, HP JetReady host-
based driver 112
Allow Manual Duplexing
HP JetReady host-based driver
153
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 104
Allow scaling from large paper, HP
Traditional host-based driver
104
alternative source support 251
Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) compliance 16
application settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
107
HP Traditional host-based
driver 65
Automatic color settings, HP
JetReady host-based driver
146
Automatic Configuration, HP
JetReady host-based driver
152
autorun CD-ROM, Windows 21
B
Back button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 163
Back Cover settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
124
HP Traditional host-based driver
80
Basic Installation
choosing 21
dialog boxes, Windows 164
Basics tab, HP Traditional host-
based driver 98
bidirectional communication
about 26
driver support 244
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
26
binding settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
141
HP Traditional host-based driver
85
bins
custom paper sizes 77, 122
driver support 246
black, printing all text as 102
booklet printing settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
142
HP Traditional host-based driver
86
both sides, printing on
HP JetReady host-based driver
139, 153
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 85, 104
Browse for Printer dialog box,
Customization Wizard 189
bundle support 245
C
Cancel button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 163
cardstock, paper type commands
224
CD-ROMs
documentation 15, 22
installing Macintosh printing-
system software 203
installing Windows printing-
system software 20, 162
languages 9
Macintosh directory structure
9
Windows directory structure 8
Change TCP/IP Settings dialog
box, Windows 175
ENWW Index 255
Check Printer Connection dialog
box, Windows 172
CHM files, viewing 16
collation settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
113
color printing
driver support 250
Image Color Management (ICM)
113
Color tab
HP JetReady host-based driver
145
HP Traditional host-based driver
101
command-line printing, Windows
237
command-line silent install for
Windows 199
commands, paper
size 222
source 220
type 224
common installer, features 22
compression
HP JetReady host-based driver
115
HP Traditional host-based driver
82
Confirm Changing Setting dialog
box, Windows 172
Confirm Network Settings dialog
box, Windows 171
Congratulations dialog box,
Windows 182
connectivity
bidirectional communication
support 26
driver support 243
features 4
Printer Connection dialog box,
Windows 166
Searching dialog box, Windows
167
constraint messages
HP JetReady host-based driver
110
HP Traditional host-based
driver 69
context-sensitive help
HP JetReady host-based driver
110
HP Traditional host-based
driver 69
continuous export 29
control panel settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
107
HP Traditional host-based
driver 65
Copy Count settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
113
HP Traditional host-based driver
99
covers, use different paper settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
124
HP Traditional host-based driver
80
Custom Installation
choosing 21
dialog boxes, Windows 164
Custom Installer Location dialog
box, Windows
Customization Wizard 195
custom paper sizes
HP JetReady host-based driver
121
HP Traditional host-based driver
75
supported 223
Customization Wizard 185
D
default printer, setting 200
destinations, paper 220
Device Settings tab
HP JetReady host-based driver
151
HP Traditional host-based driver
103
diagnostics 31, 149
dialog boxes, printing-system
software installation
Mac OS X 211
Windows 164
direct printing
FTP, Windows 237
local port, Windows 239
LPR 241
networks, Windows 241
UNIX 241
directory structure, software CD-
ROM 8
disabling
driver features 29
disk space requirements 5
Document Options
HP JetReady host-based driver
114, 139
HP Traditional host-based driver
85
document preview image 130,
133
documentation
Help feature support 247
install notes 17
localized versions 10
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, HP JetReady host-
based driver 119
Print Task Quick Set for user
guide, HP Traditional host-
based driver 73
user guide 16
viewing 15, 22
double-sided printing
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 139, 153
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 85, 104
downloading
firmware 225
printing-system software 7
Driver Details dialog box,
Customization Wizard 192
Driver Details dialog box, Windows
177
drivers
accessibility support 247
accessory configuration 26
Add Printer installation 184
alternative source/paper support
251
availability by operating system
7
bidirectional communication
support 244
bins supported 246
256 Index ENWW
bundle support 245
color support 250
connectivity support 243
continuous export feature 29
diagnostics 31
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
26
finishing options 252
font support 253
Help feature support 247
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 30, 245
included 23
installable options support
246
job tracking 243
Linux operating systems 6
localized versions 10
lockable features 29, 58
Macintosh 25
media supported 221
operating systems supported
23
paper source commands 220
paper supported 248
PJL encoding 242
Point and Print installation
199
Print Quality options 82
quality settings 249
Quick Sets support 248
raster compression support
242
reordering options 249
resizing options 250
Services support 246
settings 65, 107
standalone 6
tray assignment 245
user interface support 247
version numbers 24
watermarks support 251
Drivers dialog box, Customization
Wizard 191
Drivers dialog box, Windows 176
duplexing unit
custom paper sizes 77, 122
HP JetReady host-based driver
configuration 152
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 139, 153
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 85, 104
media supported 222
models including 3
E
Easy Printer Care
accessing 32
Find Other Printers screen 34
Maintenance Tools 44
My HP Printers screen 39
Support screen 43
Troubleshooting Tools 46
Edge Control settings, HP
JetReady host-based driver
147
Effects tab
HP JetReady host-based driver
131
HP Traditional host-based driver
90
embedded Web server. See HP
Embedded Web Server
Energy Star compliance 3
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
about 26
Novell NetWare operating
systems supported 27
Windows operating systems
supported 27
envelopes, paper type commands
224
escape sequences
paper source 220
paper type 224
EWS. See HP Embedded Web
Server
exporting driver parameters 29
F
features 3
File to E-mail utility 218
File Upload, Macintosh 56
Find Other Printers screen, HP
Easy Printer Care 34
Finish dialog box, Customization
Wizard 198
Finish dialog box, Windows 182
finishing options 252
Finishing tab
HP JetReady host-based driver
138
HP Traditional host-based driver
84
Firewall Detected dialog box,
Windows 168
firewalls dialog box, Windows
168
firmware
determining current level 225
downloading 225
FTP updates, Windows 228
HP Web Jetadmin updates
235
LPR command updates 235
Macintosh updates 57, 230,
234
messages during update 226
troubleshooting updates 226
UNIX updates 234
updating remotely 225
verifying installation 227
Windows network updates
233
Windows, local port update
230
first page out 3
First Page paper settings
HP Traditional host-based driver
81
Fit to Page settings
HP Traditional host-based driver
91
Flip Pages Up
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 141
HP Traditional host-based driver
85
fonts
driver support 253
Macintosh 202
watermarks 95
Windows 156, 158
Form to Tray Assignment, HP
JetReady host-based driver
152
Front Cover settings
ENWW Index 257
HP JetReady host-based driver
124
HP Traditional host-based driver
80
FTP
direct printing, Windows 237
Windows firmware updates
228
Full Installation
choosing 21
dialog boxes, Windows 164
G
Graphic settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
113
grayscale printing
HP Traditional host-based driver
102
guides. See documentation
H
heavy paper, paper type commands
224
help
HP JetReady host-based driver
110
HP Traditional host-based
driver 69
Macintosh 202
operating systems supported
247
Help button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 163
host-based drivers. See HP
JetReady host-based driver; HP
Traditional host-based driver
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check
Tool 31
HP Driver Preconfiguration
driver support 245
operating systems and drivers
supported 30
HP Easy Printer Care
accessing 32
Find Other Printers screen 34
Maintenance Tools 44
My HP Printers screen 39
Support screen 43
Troubleshooting Tools 46
HP Embedded Web Server
about 47, 202
documentation 17
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
18
HP JetReady host-based driver
About tab 154
accessing 108
Add Printer installation 184
Advanced Printing Features
114
Advanced tab 112
alternative source support
251
Automatic Configuration 152
bidirectional communication
support 244
bins supported 246
booklets 142
bundle support 245
color settings support 250
Color tab 145
connectivity support 243
constraint messages 110
continuous export 29
Device Settings tab 151
Document Options 114, 139
document preview image
130, 133
Edge Control 147
Effects tab 131
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
26
finishing options 252
Finishing tab 138
Flip Pages Up 141
font support 253
Form to Tray Assignment 152
Graphic setting 113
Help feature support 247
Help system 110
HP Driver Preconfiguration 30
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 245
Image Color Management (ICM)
113
Installable Options 152
installable options support
246
job tracking 243
Layout Options 115
localized versions 10
lockable features 29
operating systems supported
7, 23
Page Order 143
Pages per Sheet 143
Paper Options 120
paper supported 248
Paper/Output settings 113
Paper/Quality tab 116
PJL encoding 242
Print on Both Sides 139
Print Task Quick Sets 117
Printer Features 114
Printing Preferences tab 108
Properties tab 108
quality settings 249
Quick Sets support 248
raster compression settings
115
raster compression support
242
reordering options 249
Resizing Options 132, 250
Services tab support 246
Services tab, accessing 149
settings 107
tray assignment 245
user interface support 247
version number 24
Watermarks settings 134
watermarks support 251
HP Printer Utility
accessing 48
Additional Settings 62
Device Information 53
File Upload 56
Hp Support 54
Lock Resources 58
Network Settings 59
Rendezvous Setting 60
Supplies Management 61
Supplies Status screen 51
system requirements 48
Trays Configuration 57
Update Firmware 57, 234
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box, Windows 166
HP Traditional host-based driver
258 Index ENWW
About tab 105
accessing 67
Add Printer installation 184
alternative source support
251
Basics tab 98
bidirectional communication
support 244
bins supported 246
bundle support 245
color settings support 250
Color tab 101
compression 82
Configure tab 103
connectivity support 243
continuous export 29
Document Options 85
Effects tab 90
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
26
finishing options 252
Finishing tab 84
Fit to Page settings 91
font support 253
grayscale printing 102
Help feature support 247
Help system 69
HP Driver Preconfiguration 30
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 245
installable options support
246
job tracking 243
localized versions 10
lockable features 29
operating systems supported
7, 23
Optional Paper Sources 104
Paper Handling Options 104
Paper Options 73
paper supported 248
Paper/Quality tab 70
PJL encoding 242
Print Quality group box 82
Print Task Quick Sets 71
quality settings 249
Quick Sets support 248
raster compression support
242
reordering options 249
resizing options 250
Services tab support 246
tray assignment 245
user interface support 247
version number 24
Watermarks settings 93
watermarks support 251
HP Web Jetadmin
downloading 22, 64
Driver Preconfiguration Plugin
28
firmware updates 235
HTML files, viewing 16
I
IBM operating systems, supported
6
Image Color Management (ICM)
113
inches, settings 78
Incompatible Print Settings
messages. See constraint
messages
input trays. See trays
install notes 17
Installable Options
driver support 246
HP JetReady host-based driver
152
installation
Add Printer 184
Adobe Acrobat Reader 22
command-line silent 199
dialog boxes, Mac OS X 211
dialog boxes, Windows 164
File to E-mail utility 218
Installer Customization Wizard
for Windows 185
Macintosh printing-system
software 203
Point and Print 199
pre-existing, modifying 164
system requirements 5
Windows printing-system
software 162
Installation Type dialog box,
Windows 176
installers
availability by operating system
7
common, features 22
customizing 185
localized versions 10
Installing dialog box, Customization
Wizard 198
Installing dialog box, Windows
181
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
18
JetReady host-based driver. See
HP JetReady host-based driver
job tracking 243
L
landscape orientation settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
141, 144
HP Traditional host-based driver
85, 99
Language dialog box,
Customization Wizard 187
Language Selection dialog box,
Windows
Customization Wizard 186
printing-system 164
languages
CD-ROMs 9
selection dialog box,
Customization Wizard 186
selection dialog box, Windows
printing system 164
Layout Options, HP JetReady host-
based driver 115
license agreement dialog box,
Windows 166
Linux operating systems
driver availability 6
system requirements 5
local port command line printing,
Windows 239
localized versions
CD-ROMs 9
lockable features, drivers 29, 58
LPR commands
firmware updates 235
printing PDF files 241
ENWW Index 259
M
Macintosh operating systems
components, software 202
dialog boxes, Mac OS X printing-
system software installation
211
direct printing 237
directory structure, software CD-
ROM 9
driver versions 25
File Upload command 56
firmware updates 230, 234
fonts supported 202
HP Embedded Web Server
202
HP Printer Utility 48
in-box disk layout 210
install notes 202
installing printing-system
software 203
locking driver features 58
network settings 59
network setup 203
online help 202
PDEs 202
PPDs 202
Rendezvous Setting 60
setting up products with Mac OS
X208
supported 6
system requirements 5
tray configuration 57
uninstalling printing-system
software 209
Maintenance Tools, HP Easy
Printer Care 44
Manual color settings, HP JetReady
host-based driver 146
manuals. See documentation
margins 222
measurement units 78
media. See paper
memory
base 3
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 153
installation requirements 5
messages, constraint
HP JetReady host-based driver
110
HP Traditional host-based
driver 69
Microsoft Point and Print installation
199
millimeters, settings 78
models 3
My HP Printers screen, HP Easy
Printer Care 39
N
networks
bidirectional communication
support 243
direct printing 241
firewalls 168
firmware updates 233
HP Driver Preconfiguration 28
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 18
Macintosh settings 59
Macintosh setup 203
Point and Print installation
199
TCP/IP Settings, Windows
installation dialog box 175
Windows printing-system
software installation 162
Next button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 163
Novell NetWare operating systems,
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 27
number of copies, setting
HP JetReady host-based driver
113
HP Traditional host-based driver
99
O
operating systems
availability of software
components 7
bidirectional communication
support 244
bins supported 246
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 27
Help feature support 247
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 245
Services tab support 246
standalone drivers 6
supported 6
user interface support 247
Optional Paper Sources, HP
Traditional host-based driver
104
order of pages
HP JetReady host-based driver
115, 143
ordering supplies 22
orientation settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
141, 144
HP Traditional host-based driver
85, 99
Other Pages paper settings
HP Traditional host-based driver
81
output bins. See bins
P
Page Order
HP JetReady host-based driver
115
Page Order settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
143
HP Traditional host-based driver
88
page orientation settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
141, 144
HP Traditional host-based driver
85, 99
pages per minute 3
Pages per Sheet settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
143
HP Traditional host-based driver
87
paper
Allow scaling from large, HP
Traditional host-based driver
104
custom sizes supported 223
custom sizes, HP JetReady
host-based driver settings
121
260 Index ENWW
custom sizes, HP Traditional
host-based driver settings
75
driver support 248
margins 222
Pages per Sheet settings, HP
JetReady host-based driver
143
Pages per Sheet settings, HP
Traditional host-based driver
87
Print Document On settings, HP
JetReady host-based driver
132
Print Document On settings, HP
Traditional host-based driver
91
Print on Both Sides settings, HP
JetReady host-based driver
139
Print on Both Sides, HP
Traditional host-based driver
85
size commands 222
Size is settings, HP JetReady
host-based driver 121
Size is settings, HP Traditional
host-based driver 73
source commands 220
Source is settings, HP JetReady
host-based driver 123
Source is settings, HP
Traditional host-based driver
79
sources and destinations 220
type commands 224
Type is: settings, HP JetReady
host-based driver 123
Type is: settings, HP Traditional
host-based driver 79
types and sizes supported
221
types supported 222
Paper Handling Options, HP
Traditional host-based driver
104
Paper Options
HP JetReady host-based driver
120
HP Traditional host-based driver
73
Paper/Output settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
113
Paper/Quality tab
HP JetReady host-based driver
116
HP Traditional host-based driver
70
PCL files, command-line printing
237
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)
202
PDF files
command-line printing 237
LPR commands, printing 241
Macintosh, File Upload
command 56
viewing 15
Percentage of Normal Size setting
HP JetReady host-based driver
133
HP Traditional host-based driver
92
PJL encoding 242
Point and Print installation,
Windows printing-system
software 199
Port Creation Options dialog box,
Customization Wizard 191
port selection dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 188
portrait orientation settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
141, 144
HP Traditional host-based driver
85, 99
ports, included 4
Postscript printer description (PPD)
files 202
PPD (postscript printer description)
files 202
pre-existing installation, modifying
164
preconfiguration, driver 28
preview image, document 130,
133
Print All Text as Black 102
Print Document On settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
132
HP Traditional host-based driver
91
Print on Both Sides
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 139
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 85
Print Page Borders settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
143
HP Traditional host-based driver
88
Print Task Quick Sets
driver support 248
HP JetReady host-based driver
117
HP Traditional host-based driver
71
print-ready files 237
Printer Connection dialog box,
Customization Wizard 189
Printer Connection dialog box, Full
Installation 166
printer control panel settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
107
HP Traditional host-based
driver 65
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)
202
Printer Features, HP JetReady
host-based driver 114
Printer Found dialog box, Windows
169, 170
Printer Not Found dialog box,
Windows 169
Printer Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 188
Printer Properties tab, Windows
installation 179
Printer Settings dialog box,
Windows 174
printer, setting default 200
Printing Preferences tabs 108
Properties tabs 108
protocols
Windows installation dialog box
175
ENWW Index 261
PS emulation fonts 158
PS files, command-line printing
237
Q
quality, driver support 249
Quick Sets
driver support 248
HP JetReady host-based driver
117
HP Traditional host-based driver
71
R
Ready to Create Installer dialog box
195
Ready to Install dialog box,
Windows 179
regional versions, CD-ROMs 9
remote firmware updates
about 225
determining current firmware
level 225
downloading 225
FTP, Windows 228
HP Web Jetadmin 235
LPR commands 235
Macintosh 57, 230, 234
messages 226
troubleshooting 226
UNIX 234
verifying installation 227
Windows network 233
Windows, using local port 230
Rendezvous Setting, Macintosh
60
reordering options 249
Resizing Options
driver support 250
HP JetReady host-based driver
132
resolution
driver support 249
RFU. See remote firmware updates
RTF files, viewing 16
S
Scale to Fit setting
HP JetReady host-based driver
132
HP Traditional host-based driver
91
screen-readable documentation
16
Searching dialog box, Windows
167
Services tab 149, 246
Set Port Name dialog box, Windows
174
settings
continuous export 29
locking 29
overriding 65, 107
Print Task Quick Sets 71
Print Task Quick Sets, HP
JetReady host-based driver
117
Sharing tab, Windows 180
silent installation
command-line 199
Customization Wizard 185
sizes, paper
Allow scaling from large, HP
Traditional host-based driver
104
commands 222
custom 223
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 121
HP Traditional host-based
driversettings 73
margins 222
Print on Both Sides settings, HP
JetReady host-based driver
139
Print on Both sides, HP
Traditional host-based driver
85
supported 221
sleep mode 3
Source is settings
HP JetReady host-based driver
123
HP Traditional host-based driver
79
sources, paper. See trays
Specify Printer dialog box, Windows
173
Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 190
speed specifications 3
standalone drivers 6
status
HP Easy Printer Care 41
supplies 51
supplies
features 4
HP Easy Printer Care 41
Macintosh status 51
ordering 22
Supplies Management, HP Printer
Utility 61
Support screen, HP Easy Printer
Care 43
system requirements 5
T
text files, command-line printing
237
text, printing all as black 102
traditional driver. See HP
Traditional host-based driver
transparencies, paper type
commands 224
trays
autoconfiguration 26
custom paper sizes 77, 122
driver support 245
Form to Tray Assignment 152
HP JetReady host-based driver
configuration 152
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 104
included 4, 220
Macintosh configuration 57
media supported 222
paper source commands 220
paper type commands 224
Source is settings, HP JetReady
host-based driver 123
Source is settings, HP
Traditional host-based driver
79
troubleshooting
File to E-mail utility 218
firmware upgrades 226
HP driver Diagnostic Printer
Check Tool 31
Services tab, HP JetReady host-
based driver 149
262 Index ENWW
Troubleshooting Tools, HP Easy
Printer Care 46
two-sided printing
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 139, 153
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 85, 104
TXT files, command-line printing
237
types, paper
HP JetReady host-based driver
settings 123
HP Traditional host-based driver
settings 79
Print on Both Sides settings, HP
JetReady host-based driver
139
Print on Both sides, HP
Traditional host-based driver
85
supported 222
U
unattended installation
command-line 199
Customization Wizard 185
uninstallation
Macintosh printing system
209
units of measurement 78
UNIX operating systems
direct printing 241
print-ready printing 241
remote firmware update 234
Unsupported operating system
dialog box, Windows NT 4.0
165
Update Now feature 27, 28
updating firmware remotely. See
remote firmware update
Use Different Paper, HP Traditional
host-based driver 80
Use Different Paper/Covers, HP
JetReady host-based driver
124
user guide
Print Task Quick Set, HP
JetReady host-based driver
119
Print Task Quick Set, HP
Traditional host-based driver
73
viewing 16
V
versions, Windows drivers 24
W
wake time, setting 3
Watermarks settings
drivers supported 251
HP JetReady host-based driver
134
HP Traditional host-based driver
93
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
downloading software 7
firmware download 225
Linux product support 5
support links 22
Welcome dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 187
printing system 165
What's this? Help
HP JetReady host-based driver
110
Windows operating systems
availability of software
components 7
CD-ROM, print system 20
default printer, setting 200
dialog boxes installation 164
direct printing, FTP 237
direct printing, local port 239
direct printing, networks 241
directory structure, software CD-
ROM 8
driver versions 24
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 27
fonts supported 156
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 30
Installer Customization Wizard
185
installers 7
installing printing software
162
LPR commands 241
Point and Print installation
199
PS emulation fonts supported
158
remote firmware update 230
supported 6
system requirements 5
ENWW Index 263
264 Index ENWW
© 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*XXXXX-XXXXX*
*XXXXX-XXXXX*
XXXXX-XXXXX

Navigation menu